UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
Form 10-K
 
 
þ
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
For the year ended June 30, 2011
 
or
 
o
TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
Commission file number: 001-33506
 
SHORETEL, INC.
 
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
 
Delaware
3661
77-0443568
(State or other jurisdiction of
(Primary standard
(I.R.S. employer
incorporation or organization)
industrial code number)
identification no.)
 
960 Stewart Drive
Sunnyvale, CA 94085-3913
(408) 331-3300
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)
 
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Common Stock, $0.001 par value.
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
None
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.  Yes o No þ
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.  Yes o     No þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes þ No o
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes o No o
 
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-Kor any amendment to this Form 10-K/A. þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act (Check one):
 
 
Large accelerated filer o
Accelerated Filer þ
 
Non-accelerated filer o
Smaller reporting company o
 
(do not check if a smaller reporting company)
 
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). Yes o No þ
 
The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of December 31, 2010 was approximately $182.7 million (based on the last reported sale price of $7.87 on December 31, 2010 on The NASDAQ Global Select Market). This calculation does not reflect a determination that persons are affiliates for any other purposes. Shares of stock held by ten percent stockholders have been excluded from this calculation as they may be deemed affiliates.
 
The number of shares outstanding of the registrant’s common stock as of September 1, 2011 was 47,592,489.
 
DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
 
Part III incorporates by reference certain information from the Registrant’s definitive proxy statement (the “2011 Proxy Statement”) for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.



 
 

 

TABLE OF CONTEN TS
 
   
Page
     
PART I
     
Item 1
  3
Item 1A
  12
Item 1B
  27
Item 2
  27
Item 3
  27
Item 4 Reserved   27
Item 5
  27
     
PART II
     
Item 6
  31
Item 7
  32
Item 7A
  47
Item 8
  48
Item 9
  71
Item 9A
  72
Item 9B
  74
     
PART III
Item 10
  74
Item 11
  74
Item 12
  74
Item 13
  74
Item 14
  74
     
PART IV
Item 15
  74
    75

 
- 1 -


TRADEMARKS
 
The ShoreTel logo, ShoreTel, ShoreCare, ShoreGear, ShorePhone, ShoreWare, Brilliantly Simple, Brilliantly Simple Communication,   Agito Networks, Dual Persona and RoamAnywhere are trademarks or registered trademarks of ShoreTel, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks, trade names and service marks herein are the property of their respective owners.
 
AVAILABLE INFORMATION
 
Our Internet address is www.shoretel.com. On our Internet website, we make publicly available free of charge our annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file such material with, or furnish it to, the Securities and Exchange Commission.
 
In addition, the public may read and copy any materials we file with the SEC at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains an Internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC at http://www.sec.gov.
 
The charters of our Audit Committee, our Compensation Committee and our Corporate Governance and Nominating Committee, as well as our Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, are available on the Investor Relations section of our website under “Corporate Governance.” This information is also available by writing to us at the address on the cover of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
 
 
 
- 2 -


This report contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Forward-looking statements relate to expectations concerning matters that are not historical facts. Words such as “projects,” “believes,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “expects,” “intends” and similar words and expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. While we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot assure you that those expectations will prove to be correct. Important factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially from those expectations are disclosed in this report, including, without limitation, in the “Risk Factors” described in Part I, Item 1A. All forward-looking statements are expressly qualified in their entirety by these factors and all related cautionary statements. We do not undertake any obligation to update any forward-looking statements.
 
ITEM 1.
BUSIN ES S
 
Overview
 
We are a leading provider of brilliantly simple business communication solutions. Our Unified Communications (UC) and Contact Center solutions are based on our award-winning Internet Protocol (IP) business phone system (IP-PBX). We offer organizations of all sizes integrated voice, video, data and mobile communications on an open, distributed IP architecture and switch-based hardware platform which enable multi-site enterprises to be served by a single system. Our solutions enable a single point of management, easy installation and a high degree of scalability and reliability.  They also provide end-users with a consistent, full suite of features across the enterprise, regardless of location, which helps IT management meet growing demands for powerful communication capabilities. As a result, we believe our solutions enable enhanced end-user productivity and provide lower total cost of ownership and higher customer satisfaction than alternative systems.
 
Our business communication solutions are comprised of hardware and software components including ShoreTel Voice Switches, ShoreTel IP Phones, ShoreTel Appliances and ShoreTel Software Applications for system management and user interfaces. The mobility component of our UC solution is comprised of an appliance coupled with system management and end-user software.  Our mobility offering is platform agnostic in that it works with the ShoreTel IP-PBX but also works across several leading IP-PBXs and UC systems on the market today, including Cisco, Avaya, Mitel, and Microsoft Lync. Our mobility enterprise customers include multi-site Fortune 500 companies. As of June 30, 2011, we had sold our IP phone system with integrated unified communications and contact center capabilities to approximately 18,000 enterprise customers. We sell our solutions through our extensive network of over 900 distributors and resellers.
 
We have achieved broad industry recognition for our technology and high customer satisfaction. We have won the “best overall” CustomerSat Achievement award (ACE) for three years in a row. For the last eight years, IT executives surveyed by Nemertes Research, an independent research firm, have rated ShoreTel the Best IP Telephony Provider.
 
We were originally incorporated in California in September 1996, and reincorporated in Delaware in June 2007. ShoreTel is based in Sunnyvale, California, and has regional offices in Austin, Texas; Maidenhead, United Kingdom; Sydney, Australia; and Singapore.
 
Products
 
We provide business communication solutions for the enterprise. Our solutions are based on our distributed software architecture and appliance-based hardware platform that enable a single system to serve multi-site enterprises. This architecture provides high network reliability and allows for a single view for management and administration across all sites of a multi-site enterprise. System administrators can make changes anywhere throughout the system through a Web-browser interface that presents a user-friendly view of the system’s configuration. Our architecture also provides end-users with a consistent and full set of features across an enterprise, regardless of location.
 
We introduced our first suite of products in 1998 and have continued to add features and functionality since then. We offer an IP phone system with integrated unified communications (including mobility) and contact center capabilities. We also offer the mobility component of our UC solution on a stand-alone basis to businesses without a ShoreTel IP-PBX platform. Our solutions are composed of hardware and software components including ShoreTel Voice Switches, ShoreTel IP Phones, ShoreTel Software applications encompassing system management and end-user applications. As new software versions of our solutions have been released, existing enterprise customers have been able to upgrade their switches, phones and applications, allowing them to preserve their ShoreTel investment.
 
 
IP Phone System
 
The ShoreTel IP Phone system provides call routing, voice processing, messaging, voice conferencing, and other core voice services for business communications. Our solution contains several advanced UC features that we include without additional cost, including a desktop client and unified messaging features.
 
 
·
ShoreTel IP Phones : We offer a range of innovative, high performance phones to meet the needs of the different types of end-users across the enterprise. Our phones are designed to provide a superior combination of ergonomics, sound quality and appearance. We offer a variety of phones that vary by user interface style and size, sound quality, line capacity and Gigabit Ethernet support.  A large color touch screen graphical user interface with haptic feedback is available to provide a rich user experience and high functionality.  Beam forming microphones are used to provide enhanced speakerphone sound quality. ShoreTel IP Phones are designed to function without any configuration, simplifying installation. Remote workers can also utilize ShoreTel IP Phones using an integrated Virtual Private Network (VPN) feature and mobile workers can select Wi-Fi phones that work with the open interfaces of the system.
 
 
·
ShoreTel Voice Switches:   We offer a range of switches of varying capabilities to meet the needs of enterprises of all sizes. The modular nature of our switches allows our enterprise customers to easily expand their system capacity by deploying additional switches across their network. Our switches provide call management functionality.  Each switch in the system is capable of independently establishing and terminating calls without relying on a centralized call control server. As a result, enterprise unified communications can survive a variety of LAN, WAN and hardware failures. The high reliability of our switches is enhanced by two key design features:  (i) the use of flash memory instead of disk drives and (ii) running an embedded operating system optimized for real-time processing, such as call management. Unlike disk drives, flash memory does not rely on mechanical movement, and therefore is less likely to break down and cause our systems to fail. Furthermore, our embedded operating system enables a higher performing and more reliable software platform relative to server-centric IP systems because it is optimized for real-time processing. The reliability of the system can be further improved by adding an additional switch to the headquarters  location to create “n+1” redundancy, rather than requiring a dedicated back-up switch for each primary switch to improve reliability as needed by alternative systems. In addition, our switches connect to the public telephone network through one of several interfaces, including high-density T1 and E1 interfaces.
 
 
·
ShoreTel Director: ShoreTel Director provides enterprises with a single point of system management, enabling IT administrators to view and manage the entire system of the enterprise from any location using a single application. A new end user’s extension, mailbox and automated attendant profile can be added from a single management screen, avoiding the additional work required with most Private Branch Exchanges (PBXs), voice mail systems and automated attendants.
 
 
·
Unified Messaging: Our Unified Messaging solution integrates our voicemail application with Microsoft Outlook. This enables end users to receive, send, be notified of and play voice mail messages through their Microsoft Outlook email.
 
 
·
Automated Attendant:   Our Automated Attendant solution provides end users with a 24-hour automated call answering and routing capability that enables the enterprise to direct callers to appropriate individuals, workgroups or messages
 
 
·
Small Business Edition: Our Small Business Edition (SBE) solution is targeted for smaller enterprises who are in their early stages or are currently operating on a relatively smaller scale than our enterprise customers.  The solution is a bundled solution consisting limited user licenses, voice switches, server, and feature licenses.  This solution allows our customers to economically scale our products and solutions as their organizations begin to grow and expand.
 
Unified Communications
 
ShoreTel Unified Communications provide advanced communications to business including voice calling, instant messaging, unified messaging, device agnostic mobility capability, desktop collaboration and video. The solution includes voice telephones, switching infrastructure, end-user interfaces, and platform software.
 
 
 
·
ShoreTel Communicator : ShoreTel Communicator is a powerful UC application for users across an organization, whether an operator, a contact center agent, a knowledge worker or a road warrior. Available on multiple operating systems, ShoreTel Communicator makes it easy for people to communicate any way they choose: by video, voice (wired or wireless), instant messaging (IM), and more. One single interface makes training simple and reduces the IT workload because there is just a single application to support, and no additional servers to deploy and maintain.
 
 
·
ShoreTel Conferencing Bridge: ShoreTel Conferencing Bridge enables enterprises to conduct large audio conferences and provides collaboration tools for application sharing, desktop sharing, instant messaging and end-user presence information.
 
 
·
Microsoft Integration™ : For customers seeking to leverage their investment in Microsoft’s Unified Communications portfolio, ShoreTel offers a range of integration options. Users can leverage their Microsoft Exchange messaging platform and Microsoft Office™.
 
Contact Center
 
ShoreTel Contact Center includes a range of options including agent phones, switching infrastructure, end-user interfaces, and platform software. The solution features call handling, self-service, multi-media, and reporting capabilities.
 
Contact Center applications provide a range of features to satisfy the needs of all sizes of organizations, from basic call center capabilities to sophisticated distributed multimedia contact center capabilities. Contact Center enables organizations to route incoming contacts to the most appropriate agent in a multisite contact center, regardless of location.
 
 
·
Workgroups: Workgroups is a licensing option for our contact center solution used for basic contact center needs.
 
Enterprise Mobility
 
ShoreTel Mobility extends the capabilities of a desk phone and unified communications capabilities to leading smartphones and allows the user to communicate from any location, including office, home or through hotspots, enabling access to any cellular or WiFi network, simply and cost effectively.
 
 
·
ShoreTel Mobility Router: The ShoreTel Mobility Router is a scalable network appliance that fuses enterprise wireless LANs, carrier cellular networks, IP telephony and location technology to extend voice and UC to mobile devices. The router allows users to make and receive calls from both the enterprise and personal mobile phone numbers and automatically selects the best network (Wi-Fi or cellular) with fast and automatic network handover, to optimize cost, call quality and battery life.
 
 
·
ShoreTel RoamAnywhere Client: ShoreTel Mobility’s RoamAnywhere Client for mobile devices is designed to extend UC applications with location technology information to single- and dual-mode (WiFi and cellular) mobile handsets. End users can use enterprise deskphone features such as extension dialing, call transfer and directory query on their smartphones. Additionally, they can make and receive calls from both enterprise and personal cellular numbers while the best network (Wi-Fi or cellular) is automatically selected. Seamless and automatic network handover helps call continuity across networks, and moves calls to Wi-Fi when available, thereby reducing mobile costs.
 
Business Integration
 
We offer businesses the option to enhance their communications by enabling the integration of best in breed business applications including several customer relationship management (CRM) solutions, such as Salesforce.com, Microsoft Dynamics, Netsuite and RightNow, as well as cost recovery applications, including Equitrak, Copitrak, and Lexis/Nexis Time Matters. These integrations are designed to improve the productivity of end users that use these applications by seamlessly integrating communications capabilities into their data-driven workflow. Customers or partners can create additional business integrations using the open interfaces of the system available for developers through the ShoreTel Innovation Network.
 
ShoreTel Global Services
 
 
We complement our product offerings with a broad range of services to help us maintain and expand our relationships with enterprise customers and distribution partners. Our product support contracts provide us with recurring revenue. Typically, our resellers provide many of these services, with ShoreTel providing manufacturer and escalation support as needed, or if requested by the enterprise customer, we provide these services directly.
 
ShoreTel Global Services include support, training, system design and installation, and professional services including:
 
 
·
Our support services include Web-based access support services and tools, access to technical support engineers, hardware replacement and software updates. These services are offered under support contracts with terms of up to five years.
 
 
·
Training services include certification programs for resellers, training programs at enterprise customer or reseller locations and self-paced, computer-based desktop training programs.
 
 
·
System design and installation services include the assessment of unified communications, contact center and mobility requirements of a particular enterprise, the configuration of systems to meet customer specifications and maximize operating efficiencies, management of the installation, and the subsequent testing and implementation of our systems.
 
 
·
Professional services include catalogue and custom software development to extend system capabilities, enable UC integration with other enterprise applications, streamline business processes and address enterprise customer-specific business opportunities and collaborate with third party developers through ShoreTel’s SDK program, the ShoreTel Innovation Network.
 
Technology
 
Our systems are based on a combination of our proprietary software, industry-standard interfaces and protocols, and customized and off-the-shelf hardware components. We have developed proprietary technologies that are critical to the operation of the servers and ShoreTel Voice Switches within our systems and provide our systems with the properties that distinguish them from alternative IP systems.
 
The key elements of our distributed software architecture include software that:
 
 
allows a geographically-distributed system to operate and be managed as a single system;
 
 
enables calling between ShoreTel Voice Switches and allows calls to be distributed among Voice Switches instead of using a single centralized call control server;
 
 
enables  ShoreTel Voice Switches to obtain call routing information;
 
 
monitors the bandwidth consumed on each WAN segment and prevents the system from exceeding bandwidth limitations;
 
 
monitors all call activity on Voice Switches, and enables integration of ShoreTel and third-party applications;
 
 
coordinates the functions of all servers and Voice Switches on the system, allowing them to perform as a single, virtual server;
 
 
enables remote ShoreTel and third-party applications to access and modify our systems;
 
 
enables the Voice Switches to communicate with the application server, and receive system configuration information;
 
 
allows each Voice Switch to maintain a comprehensive view of the system;
 
 
provides a graphical user interface for our phones;
 
 
allows the system to scale from small to large simply by adding additional components; and
 
 
- 6 -

 
 
allows centralized monitoring and management of the system independent of the geographical location of the users or system components.
 
Our switch-based software also uses industry-standard Session Initiation Protocol, or SIP, and Media Gateway Control Protocol, or MGCP, for setting up calls.
 
ShoreTel Voice Switches are comprised of off-the-shelf, embedded microprocessors and networking components, such as ethernet controllers, and customized integrated circuits. These Voice Switches run on an embedded operating system, and use random access memory and flash memory as well as our switch call management software for application processing. ShoreTel IP phones are comprised of enterprise IP phone semiconductors using customized LCD displays, microphones, speaker circuitry and custom software providing plug and play installation and management, ease of use and a rich feature set.
 
ShoreTel provides client and server-side application software for control and management of IP phones for individuals, workgroups such as contact centers, as well as the system manager.  Client applications are available for personal computers, mobile phones and web browsers.
 
Enterprise Customers
 
Our enterprise customers include small, medium and large companies and public institutions in a wide range of vertical markets, including professional services, financial services, government, education, health care, manufacturing, non-profit organizations, and technology industries. As of June 30, 2011, we had sold our IP unified communications systems to approximately 18,000 enterprise customers.
 
We believe that maintaining the highest possible levels of customer satisfaction is critical to our ability to retain existing and gain new enterprise customers. We believe that satisfied enterprise customers will purchase more of our products and serve as advocates for our systems, and we work closely with them as they deploy and use our systems. We follow implementations with a formal review with the enterprise customer that involves contacts with our internal staff and third-party technical personnel. We take prompt action to resolve any issues that might have been identified. We also have frequent follow-up contacts with our enterprise customers to promptly resolve issues and ensure that they are fully satisfied with their system. We also survey enterprise customers that use our technical support services to ensure that high-quality support services are being provided. Through this process, we gain valuable insights into the existing and future requirements of our enterprise customers’ activities and this helps us develop product enhancements that address the evolving requirements of enterprises.
 
Additionally, to promote high-quality support throughout our services organization, we measure key performance indicators and operational metrics of our services organization, including call answer times, call abandon rates, customer satisfaction with technical support, time to issue resolution, call interaction quality, as well as customer satisfaction with system implementation, training services and technical support, and use the results to direct the management of our services organization.
 
We also monitor our enterprise customers’ satisfaction with our channel partners by surveying our enterprise customers after the system is installed. We actively encourage our channel partners to maintain and improve our enterprise customers’ levels of satisfaction. We also monitor our channel partners’ satisfaction with ShoreTel, as their satisfaction with and advocacy of ShoreTel is also very important to our success.
 
Sales and Marketing
 
We sell our products and services primarily through an extensive network of channel partners, including distributors. As of June 30, 2011, we had over 900 channel partners in our network. These channel partners range in size from single-site, regional firms with specialized products and services to multi-national firms that provide a full range of IT products and services including the top three U.S. telecommunication carriers: AT&T, Verizon and Qwest/CenturyLink. Our channel partners market and sell our products into both the large and small-to-medium enterprise markets.
 
We maintain a sales organization that recruits, qualifies and trains new channel partners, participates in sales presentations to potential enterprise customers and assesses customer feedback to assist in developing product roadmaps. As part of our increased focus on sales to large accounts, we also have a major accounts program whereby sales personnel assist our channel partners in selling to and providing support for large enterprise customer accounts. No single channel partner or value-added distributor accounted for ten percent or more of our total revenue in fiscal 2011.
 
We believe our channel partner network allows us to effectively sell our systems without the need to build large dedicated in-house sales and service capabilities. We continue to work with existing channel partners to expand their sales of our systems and to recruit new channel partners with a focus on increasing market coverage.
 
Our internal marketing team focuses on increasing our “Brilliantly Simple” brand awareness, communicating product advantages and generating qualified leads for our sales force and channel partners. In addition to providing marketing materials, we communicate product and service offerings through email and direct mail campaigns, print and Web-based advertising, press releases and Web-based demonstrations.
 
Backlog
 
Our backlog at June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009 was approximately $6.1 million, $9.1 million and $5.7 million respectively. Our backlog consists of orders received from value-added resellers but not shipped before the end of the quarter in which the order was received, and excludes orders from distributors, as we recognize product revenue on sales made through distributors upon sell-through to our value-added resellers. Although we believe that the orders included in the backlog are firm, all orders are subject to possible rescheduling by customers and some orders may be cancelled by customers, and we may elect to allow such cancellations without penalty to the customer. Therefore, we do not believe that our backlog, as of any particular date, is necessarily indicative of actual revenue for any future period.
 
Research and Development
 
We believe that our ability to enhance our current products, develop and introduce new products on a timely basis, maintain technological competitiveness and meet enterprise customer requirements is essential to our success. To this end, we have assembled a team of engineers with expertise in various fields, including voice and IP communications, unified communications network design, data networking and software engineering. Our principal research and development activities are conducted in Sunnyvale, California and Austin, Texas. We have invested significant time and financial resources into the development of our architecture, including our switches and related software. We intend to continue to expand our product offerings, improve the features available on our products and integrate our systems with third-party enterprise applications. Research and development expenses were $45.5 million, $33.6 million, and $30.7 million in fiscal years 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
 
Manufacturing and Suppliers
 
We outsource the manufacturing of our hardware products. This outsourcing allows us to:
 
 
avoid costly capital expenditures for the establishment of manufacturing operations;
 
 
focus on the design, development, sales and support of our hardware products; and
 
 
leverage the scale, expertise and purchasing power of specialized contract manufacturers.
 
Currently, we have arrangements for the production of our switches with a contract manufacturer in the United States and for the production of our phones with contract manufacturers located in China. Our reliance on contract manufacturers involves a number of potential risks, including the absence of adequate capacity, ownership of certain elements of electronic designs, and reduced control over delivery schedules. Our contract manufacturers provide us with a range of operational and manufacturing services, including component procurement and performing final testing and assembly of our products. We typically depend on our contract manufacturers to procure components and to maintain adequate manufacturing capacity. We typically fulfill product orders out of our Fremont, California location or United Kingdom and Australia warehouses.
 
We regularly provide forecasts for orders, and we order products from our contract manufacturers based on our projected sales levels, which is well in advance of receiving customer orders. However, enterprise customers may generally cancel or reschedule orders without penalty, and delivery schedules requested by enterprise customers in these orders frequently vary based upon each enterprise customer’s particular needs.
 
We also rely on sole or limited numbers of suppliers for several key components utilized in the assembly of our products. For example, our contract manufacturers purchase semiconductors that are essential to the production of our phones from a single source supplier, and we have not identified any alternative suppliers for these components. This reliance is amplified by the fact that our contract manufacturers maintain relatively low inventories and acquire components only as needed. As a result, our ability to respond to enterprise customer orders efficiently may be constrained by the then-current availability or terms and pricing of these components. Constraints on our ability to respond efficiently is partially offset by build-up of levels of safety stock inventory which lets us respond to our enterprise customer orders in a timely manner. We cannot assure you that we will be able to obtain a sufficient quantity of these components in a timely manner to meet the demands of our enterprise customers or that prices of these components will not increase. In addition, we cannot assure you that our suppliers continue to offer components that we need.  Any delays or any disruption of the supply of these components could also materially and adversely affect our operating results.
 
Financial Information about Geographic Areas
 
For financial information about geographic areas, refer to Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this report.
 
Competition
 
The market for business communication solutions is quickly evolving, highly competitive and subject to rapid technological change. As a result of the convergence of voice, video, messaging, mobility and data networking technologies that characterize IP enterprise unified communications solutions, we compete with providers of enterprise unified communications solutions, such as:
 
 
Providers of pure IP communication systems, including Cisco Systems and Interactive Intelligence
 
 
Providers of Open Source IP communication systems, including Digium
 
 
Providers of hybrid IP/TDM communication systems, including Aastra, Avaya, Alcatel-Lucent, Mitel Networks, NEC, and Siemens
 
 
Providers of Unified Communications software applications providers, including Microsoft
 
 
Providers of Hosted PBX services from service providers, including incumbent local exchange carriers, or ILECs, and competitive local exchange carriers, or CLECs, and
 
 
Providers of mobile communication systems, including Research in Motion
 
In addition, because the market for our products is subject to rapid technological change as the market evolves, we may face competition in the future from companies that do not currently compete in the enterprise unified communications market, including companies that currently compete in other sectors of the information technology, communications and software industries or communications companies that serve consumer rather than enterprise customers.
 
We may also face competition from internet portal-focused providers who extend their portfolio to include business communications solutions, such as Skype/Microsoft, Google and Yahoo.
 
In particular, as more enterprises converge their voice and data networks, the business information technology and communication applications deployed on converged networks become more integrated. We may face increased competition from current leaders in information technology infrastructure, information technology, personal and business applications and the software that connects the network infrastructure to those applications. This could include network systems providers such as Brocade, Hewlett-Packard, and Juniper Networks.
 
We could also face competition from new market entrants, whether from new ventures or from established companies moving into the market. Competition from these and other potential market entrants may take many forms, including offering products and applications similar to those we offer as part of a larger, bundled offering or as a “cloud”-based services offering. In addition, technological developments and consolidation within the communications industry result in frequent changes to our group of competitors.
 
Many of our current and potential competitors are substantially larger than we are and have higher brand familiarity with buyers, and significantly greater financial, sales, marketing, and distribution, technical, manufacturing and other resources. We believe that we currently compete favorably with regard to the principal competitive factors applicable to our products, which include:
 
 
Lower selling costs for resellers and distributors with greater ease of implementation
 
 
Lowest total cost of ownership over a multi-year period compared to competitor’s IP and hybrid system, based on independent data from third parties such as Alinean Research and Nemertes Research
 
 
Highest ratings in customer satisfaction, as reported by an independent third party, Nemertes Research, for the last eight years in a row
 
 
Superior product scalability, without forklift upgrades, supporting from 10 to 20,000 users in a single image configuration
 
 
World-class customer service and support from technicians and support centers located around the world
 
 
Greater ease of management for system administrators
 
 
Intuitive productivity tools for employees with integrated unified communications capabilities, and
 
 
Highest system availability and reliability with our N+1 distributed switch architecture
 
For more information concerning competition, please see “Risk Factors - Risks Related To Our Business and Industry – “The market in which we operate is intensely competitive, and many of our competitors are larger, more established and better capitalized than we are” and – “As voice, video, messaging and data networks converge, we are likely to face increased competition from Microsoft and other companies in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries.”
 
Intellectual Property
 
A factor of our success as a company is our ability to protect our core technology and intellectual property. To accomplish this, we rely on a combination of intellectual property rights, including patents, trade secrets, copyrights and trademarks, as well as customary contractual protections.
 
As of June 30, 2011, we have 33 patents issued in the United States, and have 61 patent applications in the United States. Our patents have a range of expiration dates. The earliest patent to expire will do so in 2016, and the last to expire will do so in 2026.
 
The steps we have taken to protect our intellectual property rights may not be adequate. Third parties may infringe or misappropriate our intellectual property rights and may challenge our issued patents. In addition, other parties may independently develop similar or competing technologies designed around any patents that are or may be issued to us. We intend to enforce our intellectual property rights vigorously, and from time to time, we may initiate claims against third parties that we believe are infringing on our intellectual property rights if we are unable to resolve matters satisfactorily through negotiation. If we fail to protect our proprietary rights adequately, our competitors could offer similar products, potentially significantly harming our competitive position and decreasing our revenue.
 
Employees
 
As of June 30, 2011, we had 634 employees in North America, Europe, Asia and Australia, of which 264 were in sales and marketing, 208 were in research and development, 100 were in global support services, and 62 were in general and administrative functions.  None of our employees are represented by labor unions and we consider current employee relations to be good.
 
 None of our employees are represented by labor unions and we consider current employee relations to be good.
 
Executive Officers
 
The following table sets forth information about our executive officers as of September 1, 2011:
 
Name
 
Age
 
Position
         
Peter Blackmore
 
63
 
President and Chief Executive Officer
Donald J. Girskis
 
51
 
Senior Vice President, Worldwide Sales
Michael E. Healy
 
50
 
Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Edwin J. Basart
 
62
 
Founder, Chief Technology Officer and Director
Pedro E. Rump
 
55
 
Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations
Ava M. Hahn
 
38
 
Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary
 
 
- 10 -

 
Peter Blackmore has served as our President and Chief Executive Officer since December 2010.  From July 2008 to September 2009 Mr. Blackmore served as President, Chief Executive Officer and a member of the Board of Directors of UTStarcom, Inc., a provider of Internet protocol-based network solutions, and served as President and Chief Operating Officer of UTStarcom from July 2007 to June 2008. From 2005 until he joined UTStarcom, Mr.     Blackmore served as Executive Vice President in charge of world-wide sales, marketing and technology at Unisys Corporation. Prior to joining Unisys in 2005, Mr. Blackmore served as Executive Vice President of the Customer Solutions Group at Hewlett-Packard Company from 2004 and as Executive Vice President of the Enterprise Systems Group from 2002 through 2004. From 1991 until its acquisition by Hewlett-Packard in 2002, Mr.     Blackmore served in a number of senior management positions with Compaq Computer Corporation, most recently as its Executive Vice President of worldwide sales and services from 2000 through 2002. Mr.     Blackmore serves on the board of directors of MEMC Electronic Materials     Inc. Mr.     Blackmore holds an M.A. in Economics from Trinity College, Cambridge, U.K.
 
Donald J. Girskis has served as our Senior Vice President of Worldwide Sales since February 2008. Mr. Girskis served as interim Chief Executive Officer from October to December 2010.  From 1993 to 2008, Mr. Girskis held a variety of executive positions at Sprint-Nextel, a telecommunications company, most recently as the Senior Vice President and General Manager of Boost Mobile, a subsidiary of Sprint-Nextel. At Nextel, Mr. Girskis held the position of Area Vice President of Sales, Area Vice President of Marketing, Vice President of Engineering, and General Manager. Prior to Sprint-Nextel, Mr. Girskis held sales management positions with Businessland, and Los Angeles Cellular Telephone Company. Mr. Girskis holds a B.A. in business administration from California State University at Fullerton.
 
Michael E. Healy has served as our Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer since May 2007. From February 2004 to May 2007, he served as Chief Financial Officer and Senior Vice President of Finance of Genesis Microchip Inc., a supplier of display image processors. From November 2002 to February 2004, Mr. Healy served as Chief Financial Officer of Jamcracker, Inc., a software and application service provider. From September 1997 to June 2002, Mr. Healy held senior level finance positions at Exodus Communications, Inc., an Internet infrastructure outsourcing services provider (Exodus Communications sold substantially all of its assets in January 2002 and changed its name to EXDS, Inc. in February 2002), including as Senior Vice President of Finance prior to February 2002, and as its Chief Financial Officer and Corporate Treasurer from February 2002 to June 2002. From 1987 to 1997, Mr. Healy held various financial management positions at Apple Computer, Inc., and was an auditor at Deloitte & Touche LLP from 1983 to 1987. Mr. Healy holds a B.S. in accounting from Santa Clara University and is a Certified Public Accountant. Mr. Healy is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and the California Society of Certified Public Accountants.
 
Edwin J. Basart co-founded ShoreTel in 1996 and has served as our Chief Technology Officer and as a director since inception. Mr. Basart will serve as Special Advisor to the Board upon the expiration of his term as a director in November 2011, and will also continue to serve as our Chief Technology Officer.  Prior to co-founding ShoreTel, Mr. Basart co-founded Network Computing Devices, Inc., a provider of thin client computing hardware and software, where he served as Vice President of Engineering, and Ridge Computers, Inc. where he served as Vice President of Software. Mr. Basart began his career as a software engineer at Hewlett Packard. Mr. Basart holds a B.S. in English from Iowa State University and an M.S. in electrical engineering from Stanford University.
 
Pedro E. Rump has served as our Senior Vice President of Engineering and Operations since January 2011.  Prior to then, he served as our Vice President of Engineering and Operations since 2006. From July 2004 to January 2006, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering and Operations at Dust Networks, Inc., a developer of embedded wireless sensor networking products. From January 2004 to July 2004, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering at Sonim Technologies, Inc., a provider of voice over IP applications. From January 2003 to January 2004, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering at Littlefeet Inc. From January 2002 to October 2002, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Inviso, a developer of signal transport and display solutions for television and telecommunications. Mr. Rump holds a B.S. and M.S. in electrical engineering from the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology.
 
Ava M. Hahn has served as our Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary since May 2009. Ms. Hahn joined ShoreTel in June 2007 serving in the position of General Counsel and Secretary. From August 2002 to May 2007, Ms. Hahn served as General Counsel, Assistant General Counsel and Secretary for Genesis Microchip, Inc., a supplier of display image processors. From August 2000 to August 2002, Ms. Hahn served as Director, Legal Affairs for LuxN, Inc., a provider of optical access equipment. Prior to then, Ms. Hahn was in private practice at Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C. Ms. Hahn holds a J.D. from Columbia Law School and a B.A. from the University of California, Berkeley.
 
 
- 11 -

 
ITEM 1A.
RISK FACTO RS
 
Risks Related to Our Business and Industry
 
Current uncertainty in global economic conditions makes it particularly difficult to predict demand for our products and forecast revenues, and makes it more likely that our actual results could differ materially from expectations.
 
Our operations and performance depend on worldwide economic conditions, which have been volatile in the United States and other countries, and may remain volatile or depressed for the foreseeable future. These conditions make it difficult for our customers and potential customers to accurately forecast and plan future business activities, and have caused our customers and potential customers to slow or reduce spending on capital equipment such as our products. These economic conditions could also cause our competitors to drastically reduce prices or take unusual actions to gain a competitive edge, which could force us to provide similar discounts and thereby reduce our profitability. These factors make it difficult for us to forecast demand for our products and provide revenue guidance.  We cannot predict the timing, strength or duration of the current economic slowdown or subsequent economic recovery, worldwide, in the United States, or in our industry. In addition, these factors could have a material adverse effect on demand for our products and services, and on our financial condition, including profitability and operating results.
 
 Our business could be harmed by adverse economic conditions in our target markets, reduced spending on information technology and telecommunication products by customers and potential customers, and the tightening of the credit markets.
 
Our business depends on the overall demand for information technology, and in particular for telecommunications systems. The market we serve is emerging and the purchase of our products involves significant upfront expenditures. In addition, the purchase of our products can be discretionary and may involve a significant commitment of capital and other resources. In many cases, our resellers and/or end customers procure our products and services on credit. If credit is not available to them, it may be difficult or impossible for our resellers and/or end customers to purchase our products. Weak economic conditions in our target markets, or a reduction in information technology or telecommunications spending even if economic conditions improve, would likely adversely impact our business, operating results and financial condition in a number of ways, including longer sales cycles, lower prices for our products and reduced unit sales.
 
We may not be able to achieve our strategic initiatives and grow our business as anticipated.
 
While we currently intend to grow our business by pursuing strategic initiatives to increase our sales capacity by expanding our sales team and our channel partnerships, enhance our product offerings and increase awareness of our company and our products among existing and prospective customers, we cannot assure you that we will be able to achieve these initiatives. Our success depends on our ability to appropriately manage our expenses as we grow our organization, identify or acquire companies or assets at attractive valuations, enter into beneficial channel relationships, develop new products, and successfully execute our marketing and sales strategies. If we are not able to execute on these actions, our business may not grow as we anticipated, and our operating results could be adversely affected.
 
The market in which we operate is intensely competitive, and many of our competitors are larger, more established and better capitalized than we are.
 
The market for IP telecommunications and other telecommunications systems is extremely competitive. Our competitors include companies that offer IP systems, such as Cisco Systems, Inc. and that offer hybrid systems, such as Alcatel-Lucent, Avaya and Mitel Networks Corporation. In addition, we compete with much larger companies such as Microsoft in the unified communications market. Several of the companies that offer hybrid systems also offer IP telecommunications systems. Many of our competitors are substantially larger and have greater financial, technical, research and development, sales and marketing, manufacturing, distribution and other resources. We could also face competition from new market entrants, whether from new ventures or from established companies moving in to the market. These competitors have various other advantages over us, including:
 
                   
 
greater market presence, name recognition and brand reputation;
 
 
larger distribution channels;
 
 
a larger installed base of telecommunications and networking systems with enterprise customers;
 
 
larger and more geographically distributed services and support organizations and capabilities;
 
 
a broader offering of telecommunications and networking products, applications and services;
 
 
 
a more established international presence to address the needs of global enterprises;
 
 
larger patent and intellectual property portfolios;
 
 
longer operating histories;
 
 
a longer history of implementing large-scale telecommunications or networking systems;
 
 
more established relationships with industry participants, customers, suppliers, distributors and other technology companies;
 
 
the ability to acquire technologies or consolidate with other companies in the industry to compete more effectively; and
 
 
the ability to bundle a broader offering of telecom and networking equipment and services into an IP PBX offering, and offer these products as part of a hosted services offering.
 
Given their capital resources, many of these competitors are in a better position to withstand any significant reduction in capital spending by enterprise customers on telecommunications equipment and are not as susceptible to downturns in a particular market. This risk is enhanced because we focus our business solely on the enterprise IP telecommunications market and do not have a diversified portfolio of products that are applicable to other market segments.
 
We compete primarily on the basis of price, feature set, reliability, scalability, usability, total cost of ownership, customer satisfaction and service. Because our competitors have greater financial strength than we do and are able to offer a more diversified bundle of products and services, they have offered and in the future may offer telecommunications products at lower prices than we do. These larger competitors can also bundle products with other services, such as hosted or managed services, effectively reducing the price of their products. In order to remain competitive from a cost perspective, we have in the past reduced the prices of our products, and we may be required to do so in the future, in order to gain enterprise customers. Price reductions could have a negative effect on our gross margins.
 
Our competitors may also be able to devote more resources to developing new or enhanced products, including products that may be based on new technologies or standards. If our competitors’ products become more accepted than our products, our competitive position will be impaired and we may not be able to increase our revenue or may experience decreased gross margins. If any of our competitors’ products or technologies become the industry standard, if they are successful in bringing their products to market earlier, or if their products are more technologically capable than ours, then our sales could be materially adversely affected. We may not be able to maintain or improve our competitive position against our current or future competitors, and our failure to do so could materially and adversely affect our business.
 
The gross margins on our products may decrease due to competitive pressures or otherwise, which could negatively impact our profitability.
 
It is possible that the gross margins on our products will decrease in the future in response to competitive pricing pressures, new product introductions by us or our competitors, changes in the costs of components, manufacturing issues,  the shift in our channel distribution model towards more value-added distributors, royalties we need to pay to use certain intellectual property, the introduction of our managed solution offering, growth of our international business, or other factors. If we experience decreased gross margins and we are unable to respond in a timely manner by introducing and selling new, higher-margin products successfully and continually reducing our product costs, our gross margins may decline, which will harm our business and results of operations.
 
As voice and data networks converge, we are likely to face increased competition from Microsoft and other companies in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries.
 
The convergence of voice and data networks and their wider deployment by enterprises has led information technology and communication applications deployed on converged networks to become more integrated. This integration has created an opportunity for the leaders in information technology, personal and business applications and the software that connects the network infrastructure to those applications, to enter the telecommunications market and offer products that compete with our systems, commonly referred to as Unified Communications. Competition from these potential market entrants may take many forms, and they may offer products and applications similar to those we offer. For example, Microsoft Corporation has announced its Lync server, which Microsoft states is a single platform that can enhance, extend, and even replace traditional and IP PBX systems. This system competes with our ShoreTel Communicator application. Microsoft and other leaders in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries, have substantial financial and other resources that they could devote to this market.
 
 
- 13 -

 
If Microsoft continues to move into the telecommunications market or if other new competitors from the information technology, personal and business applications or software industries enter the telecommunications market, the market for IP telecommunications systems will become increasingly competitive. If the solutions offered by Microsoft or other new competitors achieve substantial market penetration, or if we cannot integrate our products with Microsoft, we may not be able to maintain or improve our market position, and our failure to do so could materially and adversely affect our business and results of operations.
 
  If we fail to respond to technological changes and evolving industry standards, our products could become obsolete or less competitive in the future.
 
The telecommunications industry is highly competitive and characterized by rapidly changing technologies and standards, frequent product introductions and short product life cycles. For example, mobile telephones have experienced rapid adoption and may eventually replace desktop telephones.  Accordingly, our operating results depend upon, among other things, our ability to develop and introduce new products and our ability to reduce production costs of existing products. Our long-term success will depend on our ability to stay head of these changes and avoid obsolescence of our products.
 
The process of developing new technologies and products is complex, and if we are unable to develop enhancements to, and new features for, our existing products or acceptable new products that keep pace with technological developments or industry standards, our products may become obsolete, less marketable and less competitive and our business will be harmed.
 
In addition, as industry standards evolve, it is possible that one standard becomes predominant in the market. This could facilitate the entry into the market for competing products, which could result in significant pricing pressure. Additionally, if one standard becomes predominant and we adopt that standard, enterprises may be able to create a unified, integrated system by using phones, switches, servers, applications, or other telecommunications products produced by different companies. Therefore, we may be unable to sell complete systems to enterprise customers because the enterprise customers elect to purchase portions of their telecommunications systems from our competitors. For example, if a single industry standard is adopted, customers may elect to purchase our switches, but could purchase software applications and phones from other vendors. This could reduce our revenue and gross margins if enterprise customers instead purchase primarily lower-margin products from us. Conversely, if one standard becomes predominant, and we do not adopt it, potential enterprise customers may choose to buy a competing system that is based on that standard.
 
We rely on third-party resellers to sell our products, and disruptions to, or our failure to develop and manage our distribution channels could adversely affect our business.
 
Substantially all of our total revenue is generated through indirect channel sales. These indirect sales channels consist of third-party resellers that market and sell telecommunications systems and other products and services to customers. We expect indirect channel sales will continue to generate a substantial majority of our total revenue in the future. Therefore, our success is highly dependent upon establishing and maintaining successful relationships with third-party resellers, and the financial health of these resellers.
 
Many of the resellers we recruit never generate significant revenues for us. Recruiting, launching and retaining qualified channel partners and training them in our technology and products requires significant time and resources. In order to develop and expand our distribution channel, we must continue to recruit larger and more productive channel partners. We must also scale and improve our processes and procedures that support our channel, including investment in personnel, systems and training, and those processes and procedures may become increasingly complex and difficult to manage.
 
We have no long-term contracts or minimum purchase commitments with any of our channel partners, and our contracts with these channel partners do not prohibit them from offering products or services that compete with ours. Our competitors may be effective in providing incentives to existing and potential channel partners to favor their products or to prevent or reduce sales of our products. Our channel partners may choose not to offer our products exclusively or at all. Our failure to establish and maintain successful relationships with channel partners would likely materially adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition.
 
Our success in expanding our customer base to larger enterprises will depend in part on our ability to expand our channel to partners that serve those larger enterprises. In addition, we rely on these entities to provide many of the installation, implementation and support services for our products. Accordingly, our success depends in large part on the effective performance of these channel partners. If a partner’s performance is ineffective, it may reflect poorly upon ShoreTel or negatively impact our business. For example, if one of these resellers experiences a work stoppage due to a labor union dispute, installation of our phone systems could be delayed and our sales and reputation could suffer. By relying on channel partners, we may in some cases have little or no contact with the ultimate users of our products, thereby making it more difficult for us to establish brand awareness, ensure proper delivery and installation of our products, service ongoing enterprise customer requirements and respond to evolving enterprise customer needs. This difficulty is more pronounced where enterprise customers purchase our systems from a channel partner that purchased through a distributor. Additionally, some of our channel partners are smaller companies that may not have the same financial resources as other of our larger channel partners, which exposes us to collections risks.
 
 
We are embarking on a new distribution strategy, which could be disruptive to our business.
 
 We have recently announced that we will now sell our products through value-added distributors as well as resellers in the United States.  As a result, we have contracted with value-added distributors who will purchase our products, add value such as other products and services, and then distribute our products through resellers. This new strategy is intended to increase our distribution channel and enable our revenue growth, but it could also disrupt our existing established reseller channels and reduce our gross margins.
 
We have no long-term contracts or minimum purchase commitments with our distributors, and our contracts with these distributors do not prohibit them from offering products or services that compete with ours. Our competitors may be effective in providing incentives to existing and potential distributors to favor their products or to prevent or reduce sales of our products. Our distributors may choose not to offer our products exclusively or at all. Our failure to establish and maintain successful relationships with our distributors could materially adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition.
 
In addition, a significant portion of our product orders are usually received in the last month of each fiscal quarter, with a concentration of such orders in the final two weeks of the quarter. Orders received by our distributors during the final days of a quarter may not be recognizable as revenue to us until after the end of the quarter,  which could cause us to fall short of our expectations, and the expectations of our analysts and investors.
 
We have had significant executive management turnover, and may not be able to retain or attract the executives we need to succeed.
 
 In fiscal 2011, a new Chief Executive Officer and Vice President of Global Support joined us due to turnover in our executive team. We cannot assure you that we will be able to retain other key employees, including senior management and executive positions. If we cannot attract and retain these executives and key employees, our business would be harmed, particularly if the departure of any executive or key employee results in a business interruption, or if we are not successful in preserving material knowledge of our departing employees.
 
Our future success depends on our ability to attract, integrate and retain key personnel, and our failure to do so could harm our ability to grow our business.
 
Our company strategy and future success will depend, to a significant extent, on our ability to attract, integrate and retain our key personnel, namely our management team and experienced sales and engineering personnel. We may experience difficulty assimilating our newly hired personnel, which may adversely affect our business. In addition, we must retain and motivate high quality personnel, and we must also attract and assimilate other highly qualified employees. Competition for qualified management, sales, technical and other personnel can be intense, and we may not be successful in attracting and retaining such personnel. In addition, even if we succeed in hiring additional sales personnel, it may take some period of time before they become productive. Competitors have in the past and may in the future attempt to recruit our employees, and our management and key employees are not bound by agreements that could prevent them from terminating their employment at any time. If we fail to attract, integrate and retain key employees, our ability to manage and grow our business could be harmed.
 
 If we fail to manage our growth effectively, our business could be harmed.
 
We plan to further expand our operations, particularly in sales headcount, channel partnerships, and the number and size of enterprise customers implementing our systems. We will need to increase our operating expenses in order to fund this expansion and support larger customers. This growth will place a significant strain on our management, administrative, operational and financial infrastructure. Our success will depend upon our ability to manage this growth effectively. If we do not increase our revenues commensurate to our increased spending, we will not be profitable. To manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we will need to continue to improve our operational, financial and management controls and our reporting systems and procedures. Failure to effectively manage growth could result in difficulty in filling enterprise customer orders, declines in product quality or customer satisfaction, increases in costs, production and distribution difficulties, and any of these difficulties could adversely impact our business performance and results of operations.
 
 
            If we fail to increase our consideration rate, our business could suffer.
 
We estimate that we compete for only a fraction of the potential customers in our market due to our smaller size and lower brand recognition as compared to our much larger competitors. Many of our potential customers purchase their communications systems without ever having considered ShoreTel. We have launched a brand recognition campaign in an effort to increase our rate of consideration by prospective customers. If we do not increase our brand recognition and public awareness of our products, we may not be able to enter the sales process for many potential customers and therefore not increase sales and revenues commensurate with our increased operating expenses, which would have a negative financial impact on our business.
 
Our business may be harmed if our contract manufacturers are not able to provide us with adequate supplies.
 
We outsource the manufacturing of our products. Currently, we have arrangements for the production of our products with a contract manufacturer in the United States and contract manufacturers located in China. Our reliance on contract manufacturers involves a number of potential risks, including the absence of adequate capacity, financial viability, ownership of certain elements of electronic designs, the ongoing viability of those contract manufacturers, and reduced control over delivery schedules.
 
 We depend on our contract manufacturers to finance the production of goods ordered and to maintain adequate manufacturing capacity. Global economic conditions could adversely impact the financial condition of our contract manufacturers and their suppliers that could impact our contract manufacturer’s ability to procure components or otherwise manufacture our products. Additionally, as a result of the current economic downturn, the businesses of our contract manufacturers and other suppliers could be adversely affected and they may be required to slow or curtail operations. We do not exert direct control over our contract manufacturers or suppliers of our contract manufacturers, so we may be unable to procure timely delivery of acceptable products to our enterprise customers or incur substantially higher product costs if we move production to other contract manufacturers.
 
If sales of our products continue to grow, our contract manufacturers may not have sufficient capacity to enable it to increase production to meet the demand for our products. Moreover, our contract manufacturers could have manufacturing engagements with companies that are much larger than we are and whose production needs are much greater than ours. As a result, our contract manufacturers may choose to reallocate resources to the production of products other than ours if capacity is limited.
 
In addition, our contract manufacturers do not have any written contractual obligation to accept any purchase order that we submit for the manufacture of any of our products nor do we have any assurance that our contract manufacturers will agree to manufacture and supply any or all of our requirements for our products. Furthermore, our contract manufacturers may unilaterally terminate their relationship with us at any time upon 180 days’ notice with respect to the contract manufacturers of our switches and 90 days’ notice with respect to the contract manufacturer of our phones or seek to increase the prices they charge us. As a result, we are not assured that our current manufacturers will continue to provide us with an uninterrupted supply of products of at an acceptable price in the future.
 
Even if our contract manufacturers accept and fulfill our orders, it is possible that the products may not meet our specifications. Because we do not control the final assembly and quality assurance of our products, there is a possibility that these products may contain defects or otherwise not meet our quality standards, which could result in warranty claims against us that could adversely affect our operating results and future sales.
 
If our contract manufacturers are unable or unwilling to continue manufacturing our products in required volumes and to meet our quality specifications, or if they significantly increase their prices, whether caused by uncertain global economic conditions, tightening of the credit markets, their weak financial condition or otherwise, we will have to procure components on their behalf in the short term and identify one or more acceptable alternative contract manufacturers. The process of identifying and qualifying a new contract manufacturer can be time consuming, and we may not be able to substitute suitable alternative contract manufacturers in a timely manner or at acceptable prices. Additionally, transitioning to new contract manufacturers may cause delays in supply if the new contract manufacturers have difficulty manufacturing products to our specifications or quality standards and may result in unexpected costs to our business. Furthermore, we do not own the electronic design for our IP phones, hence it may be more difficult or costly for us to change the contract manufacturer of our phones or to arrange for an alternate of or a replacement for these products in a timely manner should a transition be required. This could also subject us to the risk that our competitors could obtain phones containing technology that is the same as or similar to the technology in our phones.
 
 
- 16 -

 
Any disruption in the supply of products from our contract manufacturers may harm our business and could result in a loss of sales, an increase in lead times on inventory orders and an increase in production costs resulting in lower gross product margins, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.
 
  If the emerging market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems does not continue to grow and if we do not increase our market share, our future business would be harmed.
 
The market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems is evolving rapidly and is characterized by an increasing number of market entrants. As is typical of a new and rapidly evolving industry, the demand for and market acceptance of, enterprise IP telecommunications systems products and services are uncertain. We cannot assure you that enterprise telecommunications systems that operate on IP networks will become widespread. In particular, enterprises that have already invested substantial resources in other means of communicating information may be reluctant or slow to implement an IP telecommunications system that can require significant initial capital expenditures as compared to a hybrid system that might require a lower initial capital expenditure despite higher potential total expenditures over the long term. If the market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems fails to develop or develops more slowly than we anticipate, our products could fail to achieve market acceptance, which in turn could significantly harm our business. This growth may be inhibited by a number of factors, such as:
 
                   
 
  
initial costs of implementation for a new system;
 
 
  
quality of infrastructure;
 
 
  
security concerns;
 
 
  
equipment, software or other technology failures;
 
 
  
regulatory encroachments;
 
 
  
inconsistent quality of service;
 
 
  
perceived unreliability or poor voice quality over IP networks as compared to circuit-switched networks; and
 
 
  
lack of availability of cost-effective, high-speed network capacity.
 
Moreover, as IP-based data communications and telecommunications usage grow, the infrastructure used to support these services, whether public or private, may not be able to support the demands placed on them and their performance or reliability may decline.
 
Even if enterprise IP telecommunications systems become more widespread in the future, we cannot assure you that our products will attain broad market acceptance. We estimate that our sales represent a very small percentage of the total available market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems. We must increase our market penetration in order to maintain and expand our business.
 
Our sales cycle can be lengthy and unpredictable, which makes it difficult to forecast the amount of our sales and operating expenses in any particular period.
 
The sales cycle for our products typically ranges from six to twelve months, or longer. Part of our strategy is to increasingly target our sales efforts on larger enterprises. Because the sales cycle for large enterprises is generally longer than for smaller enterprises, our sales cycle in the future may be even longer than it has been historically. As a result, we may have limited ability to forecast whether or in which period a sale will occur. The success of our product sales process is subject to many factors, some of which we have little or no control over, including:
 
 
  
the timing of enterprise customers’ budget cycles and approval processes;
 
 
  
a technical evaluation or trial by potential enterprise customers;
 
 
 
  
our ability to introduce new products, features or functionality in a manner that suits the needs of a particular enterprise customer;
 
 
  
the announcement or introduction of competing products; and
 
 
  
the strength of existing relationships between our competitors and potential enterprise customers.
 
We may expend substantial time, effort and money educating our current and prospective enterprise customers as to the value of, and benefits delivered by, our products, and ultimately fail to produce a sale. If we are unsuccessful in closing sales after expending significant resources, our operating results will be adversely affected. Furthermore, if sales forecasted for a particular period do not occur in such period, our operating results for that period could be substantially lower than anticipated and the market price of our common stock could decline.
 
  Our products incorporate some sole sourced components and the inability of these sole source suppliers to provide adequate supplies of these components may prevent us from selling our products for a significant period of time or limit our ability to deliver sufficient amounts of our products.
 
We rely on sole or limited numbers of suppliers for several key components utilized in the assembly of our products. For example, we source semiconductors that are essential to the operation of our phones from separate single suppliers, and we have not identified or qualified any alternative suppliers for these components. We do not have supply agreements with our sole source suppliers, and the components for our products are typically procured by our contract manufacturers. If we lose access to these components we may not be able to sell our products for a significant period of time, and we could incur significant costs to redesign our products or to qualify alternative suppliers. This reliance on a sole source or limited number of suppliers involves several additional risks, including:
                   
 
 
  
supplier capacity constraints;
 
 
  
price increases;
 
 
  
purchasing lead times;
 
 
  
inventory buildup;
 
 
  
timely delivery; and
 
 
  
component quality.
 
This reliance is exacerbated by the fact that we maintain a relatively small amount of inventory and our contract manufacturers typically acquire components only as needed. As a result, our ability to respond to enterprise customer orders efficiently may be constrained by the then-current availability or the terms and pricing of these components. Disruption or termination of the supply of these components could delay shipments of our products and could materially and adversely affect our relationships with current and prospective enterprise customers. Also, from time to time we have experienced component quality issues with products obtained from our contract manufacturers. In addition, any increase in the price of these components could reduce our gross margin and adversely impact our profitability. We may not be able to obtain a sufficient quantity of these components to meet the demands of enterprise customers in a timely manner or prices of these components may increase. In addition, problems with respect to yield and quality of these components and timeliness of deliveries could occur. These delays could also materially and adversely affect our operating results.
 
If we fail to offer high quality customer support and services, our business would suffer.
 
Once our telephone systems are deployed within our end customers’ sites, our customers depend on our support organization and/or our channel partners to resolve any issues relating to our products. A high level of customer support and services is important for the successful marketing and sale of our products. If we or our channel partners do not help our customers quickly resolve post-deployment issues and provide effective ongoing support, our ability to sell our products to existing customers would suffer and our reputation with potential customers would be harmed. Many of our channel partners offer primary support for the products they sell to customers. If the channel partners fail to provide timely and effective services, our business could be harmed. As we expand our sales, we will be required to hire and train additional support personnel. In addition, as we expand our operations internationally, our support organization will face additional challenges including those associated with delivering support, training and documentation in languages other than English. If we fail to maintain high quality customer support or to grow our support organization to match any future sales growth, our business will suffer.
 
       
 
  If we fail to forecast demand for our products accurately, we may have excess or insufficient inventory, which may increase our operating costs, decrease our revenues and harm our business.
 
We generate forecasts of future demand for our products several months prior to the scheduled delivery to our prospective customers and typically prior to receiving a purchase order from our customers. We therefore make significant investments before our resellers or customers place orders to purchase our products and before we know if corresponding shipment forecasts will be changed. Our resellers and customers are not contractually bound by the forecasts they provide us until they sign a purchase order, and the orders we ultimately receive often differ from original forecasts. If we underestimate demand for our products, we will have inadequate inventory, which could result in delays in shipments, loss of orders and reduced revenues. This is exacerbated by the fact that lead times for materials and components that we need can vary significantly and depend on factors such as the specific supplier, contract terms and demand for each component at a given time. On the other hand, if we overestimate demand for our products and increase our inventory in anticipation of customer orders that do not materialize, we will have excess inventory and we will face a risk of significant inventory write-downs. Our failure to forecast demand accurately on a timely basis could result in a decrease in our revenues and gross margins.
 
       
We may acquire other companies or technologies, which could divert our management’s attention, result in additional dilution to our stockholders, increase expenses, and otherwise disrupt our operations and harm our operating results.
 
We may acquire or invest in other businesses, products or technologies that we believe could complement or expand our capabilities or otherwise offer growth opportunities.  The pursuit of potential acquisitions may divert the attention of management and cause us to incur various expenses in identifying, investigating, and pursuing suitable acquisitions, whether or not they are consummated.  We may not realize the anticipated benefits of these acquisitions.
 
There are inherent risks in integrating and managing corporate acquisitions, and we have limited experience with acquisitions.  If we acquire additional businesses, we may not be able to integrate the acquired personnel, operations and technologies successfully, or effectively manage the combined business following the acquisition. We also may not achieve the anticipated benefits from the acquired business due to a number of factors, including:
 
·  
unanticipated costs or liabilities associated with the acquisition;

·  
diversion of management’s attention from other business concerns;

·  
harm to our existing business relationships with business partners and customers as a result of the acquisition;

·  
the potential loss of key employees;

·  
use of resources that are need in other parts of our business; and

·  
use of substantial portions of our available cash or equity to consummate the acquisition.
 
In addition, a significant portion of the purchase price of companies we acquire may be allocated to goodwill and other indefinite lived intangible assets, which must be assessed for impairment at least annually.  In the future, if our acquisitions do not yield expected returns, we may be required to take charges to our operating results based on this impairment assessment process, which could harm our results of operations. Also, contingent considerations related to the acquisitions will be re-measured to fair value at each reporting period, with any changes in the value recorded as income or expense.
 
Future acquisitions could result in dilutive issuances of equity securities or the incurrence of debt, which could adversely affect our operating results. In addition, if an acquired business fails to meet our expectations, our operating results, business and financial condition may suffer.
 
If we fail to develop and introduce new products and features in a timely manner, or if we fail to manage product transitions, we could experience decreased revenue or decreased selling prices in the future.
 
Our future growth depends on our ability to develop and introduce new products successfully. Due to the complexity of the type of products we produce, there are significant technical risks that may affect our ability to introduce new products and features successfully. For example, our future success will depend in part on our ability to introduce new applications such as contact center systems, which are based on complex software, and our ability to integrate our products with other business applications, such as Microsoft Office. As another example, we believe there is increasing demand for communications as a managed service, either on mobile phones or desk phones, whether ours or another vendors’.
 
 
In addition, we must commit significant resources to developing new products and features before knowing whether our investments will result in products that are accepted by the market. The success of new products depends on many factors, including:
 
                
 
the ability of our products to compete with the products and solutions offered by our competitors;
 
 
the cost of our products;
 
 
the reliability of our products;
 
 
the timeliness of the introduction and delivery of our products; and
 
 
the market acceptance of our products.
 
If we are unable to develop and introduce new products in a timely manner or in response to changing market conditions or enterprise customer requirements, or if these products do not achieve market acceptance, our operating results could be materially and adversely affected.
 
Product introductions by us in future periods may also reduce demand for, or cause price declines with respect to, our existing products. As new or enhanced products are introduced, we must successfully manage the transition from older products, avoid excessive levels of older product inventories and ensure that sufficient supplies of new products can be delivered to meet enterprise customer demand. Our failure to do so could adversely affect our revenue, gross margins and other operating results.
 
Our products are highly complex and may contain undetected software or hardware errors, which could harm our reputation and future product sales.
 
Because our enterprise customers rely on our products for telecommunications, an application that is critical to their business, any failure to provide high quality and reliable products, whether caused by our own failure or failures by our contract manufacturer or suppliers, could damage our reputation and reduce demand for our products. Our products have in the past contained, and may in the future contain, undetected errors or defects. Some errors in our products may only be discovered after a product has been installed and used by enterprise customers. Any errors or defects discovered in our products after commercial release could result in loss of revenue, loss of enterprise customers and increased service and warranty costs, any of which could adversely affect our business. In addition, we could face claims for product liability, tort or breach of warranty. Our purchase orders contain provisions relating to warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, which may not be upheld. Defending a lawsuit, regardless of its merit, is costly and may divert management’s attention and adversely affect the market’s perception of us and our products. In addition, if our business liability insurance coverage proves inadequate or future coverage is unavailable on acceptable terms or at all, our business, operating results and financial condition could be adversely affected.
 
       
We intend to expand our international operations, which could expose us to significant risks.
 
To date we have limited international operations and have had low amounts of revenue from international enterprise customers. The future success of our business will depend, in part, on our ability to expand our operations and enterprise customer base successfully worldwide. Operating in international markets requires significant resources and management attention and will subject us to regulatory, economic and political risks that are different from those in the United States. Because of our limited experience with international operations, our international expansion efforts may not be successful. In addition, we will face risks in doing business internationally that could adversely affect our business, including:
 
                
 
  
our ability to comply with differing technical and environmental standards and certification requirements outside the United States;
 
 
  
difficulties and costs associated with staffing and managing foreign operations;
 
 
 
  
lower gross margins due to higher discounting;
 
 
  
greater difficulty collecting accounts receivable and longer payment cycles;
 
 
  
the need to adapt our products for specific countries;
 
 
  
availability of reliable broadband connectivity and wide area networks in targeted areas for expansion;
 
 
  
unexpected changes in regulatory requirements;
 
 
  
difficulties in understanding and complying with local laws, regulations and customs in foreign jurisdictions;
 
 
  
tariffs, export controls and other non-tariff barriers such as quotas and local content rules;
 
 
  
more limited protection for intellectual property rights in some countries;
 
 
  
adverse tax consequences;
 
 
  
fluctuations in currency exchange rates, which could increase the price of our products outside of the United States, increase the expenses of our international operations and expose us to foreign currency exchange rate risk;
 
 
  
restrictions on the transfer of funds;
 
 
  
new and different sources of competition;
 
 
  
less access to the end customer due to our use of two-tier distribution internationally.
 
Our failure to manage any of these risks successfully could harm our future international operations and our overall business.
 
We are subject to environmental and other health and safety regulations that may increase our costs of operations or limit our activities.
 
We are subject to environmental and other health and safety regulations relating to matters such as reductions in the use of harmful substances, the use of lead-free soldering and the recycling of products and packaging materials. For example, the European Parliament and the Counsel of the European Union have published directives on waste electrical and electronic equipment and on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. These directives generally require electronics producers to bear the cost of collection, treatment, recovery and safe disposal of past and future products from end users and to ensure that new electrical and electronic equipment does not contain specified hazardous substances. While the cost of these directives to us cannot be determined before regulations are adopted in individual member states of the European Union, it may be substantial and may divert resources, which could detract from our ability to develop new products or operate our business, particularly if we increase international operations. We may not be able to comply in all cases with applicable environmental and other regulations, and if we do not, we may incur remediation costs or we may not be able to offer our products for sale in certain countries, which could adversely affect our results.
       
 
Some of our competitors could design their products to prevent or impair the interoperability of our products with enterprise customers’ networks, which could cause installations to be delayed or cancelled.
 
Our products must interface with enterprise customer software, equipment and systems in their networks, each of which may have different specifications. To the extent our competitors supply network software, equipment or systems to our enterprise customers; it is possible these competitors could design their technologies to be closed or proprietary systems that are incompatible with our products or to work less effectively with our products than their own. As a result, enterprise customers would be incentivized to purchase products that are compatible with the products and technologies of our competitors over our products. A lack of interoperability may result in significant redesign costs and harm relations with our enterprise customers. If our products do not interoperate with our enterprise customers’ networks, installations could be delayed or orders for our products could be cancelled, which would result in losses of revenue and enterprise customers that could significantly harm our business.
 
       
 
Our products require reliable broadband connections, and we may be unable to sell our products in markets where broadband connections are not yet widely available.
 
End users of our products must have reliable access to an enterprise customer’s wide area network in order for our products to perform properly. Accordingly, it is not likely that there will be demand for our products in geographic areas that do not have a sufficiently reliable infrastructure of broadband connections. Many geographic locations do not have reliable infrastructure for broadband connections, particularly in some international markets. Our future growth could be limited if broadband connections are not or do not become widely available in markets that we target.
 
If our enterprise customers experience inadequate performance with their wide area networks, even if unrelated to our systems, our product performance could be adversely affected, which could harm our relationships with current enterprise customers and make it more difficult to attract new enterprise customers.
 
Our products depend on the reliable performance of the wide area networks of enterprise customers. If enterprise customers experience inadequate performance with their wide area networks, whether due to outages, component failures, or otherwise, our product performance would be adversely affected. As a result, when these types of problems occur with these networks, our enterprise customers may not be able to immediately identify the source of the problem, and may conclude that the problem is related to our products. This could harm our relationships with our current enterprise customers and make it more difficult to attract new enterprise customers, which could harm our business.
 
We might require additional capital to support our business in the future, and this capital might not be available on acceptable terms, or at all.
 
Although we anticipate that our current cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments on hand will be sufficient to meet our currently anticipated cash needs, if our cash and cash equivalents balances are not sufficient to meet our future cash requirements, we will need to seek additional capital, potentially through debt or equity financings, to fund our operations. We may also need to raise additional capital to take advantage of new business or acquisition opportunities. We may seek to raise capital by, among other things:
                   
 
 
  
issuing additional common stock or other equity securities;
 
 
  
issuing debt securities; or
 
 
  
borrowing funds under a credit facility.
 
We may not be able to raise needed cash on terms acceptable to us or at all. Financings, if available, may be on terms that are dilutive or potentially dilutive to our stockholders. The holders of new securities may also receive rights, preferences or privileges that are senior to those of existing holders of common stock. In addition, if we were to raise cash through a debt financing, such debt may impose conditions or restrictions on our operations, which could adversely affect our business. If new sources of financing are required but are insufficient or unavailable, we would be required to modify our operating plans to the extent of available funding, which would harm our ability to maintain or grow our business.
 
We are exposed to fluctuations in the market value of our money market funds and investments and financial pressure on investment institutions managing our investments may lead to restrictions on access to our investments which could harm our financial condition.
 
We maintain an investment portfolio of various holdings and maturity dates. These securities are recorded on our consolidated balance sheets at fair value. This portfolio includes money market funds, U.S. Government agency securities, corporate notes and commercial paper of various issuers. If the debt of these issuers is downgraded, the carrying value of these investments could be impaired. We could face default risk from some of these issuers, which could also cause the carrying value to be impaired.
 
In addition, although a downgrade in credit ratings is not unprecedented, the impact of a downgrade of the U.S. credit rating is uncertain.  This downgrade could materially affect global and domestic financial markets and economic conditions, which may affect our financial condition and liquidity.
 
Our products include third-party technology and intellectual property, which could present additional risks.
 
We incorporate certain third-party technologies, such as our contact center, conference bridge and network monitoring software, into our products, and intend to utilize additional third-party technologies in the future. However, licenses to relevant third-party technology or updates to those technologies may not continue to be available to us on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. Furthermore, we do not own the electronic design for our phones, so it may be difficult for us to arrange for an alternate of or a replacement for these products in a timely manner. Therefore, we could face delays in product releases until equivalent technology can be identified, licensed or developed, and integrated into our current products. These delays, if they occur, could materially adversely affect our business.
 
 
Failure to protect our intellectual property could substantially harm our business.
 
Our success and ability to compete are substantially dependent upon our intellectual property. We rely on patent, trademark and copyright law, trade secret protection and confidentiality or license agreements with our employees, enterprise customers, strategic partners and others to protect our intellectual proprietary rights. However, the steps we take to protect our intellectual property rights may be inadequate. We currently have 33 issued U.S. patents and 61patent applications pending in the U.S. and outside the U.S. We cannot assure you that any additional patents will be issued. Even if patents are issued, they may not adequately protect our intellectual property rights or our products against competitors, and third-parties may challenge the scope, validity and/or enforceability of our issued patents. In addition, other parties may independently develop similar or competing technologies designed around any patents that may be issued to us.
 
In order to protect our intellectual property rights, we may be required to spend significant resources to monitor and protect such rights. We may not be able to detect infringement, and may lose our competitive position in the market before we are able to do so. In the event that we detect any infringement of our intellectual property rights, we intend to enforce such rights vigorously, and from time to time we may initiate claims against third parties that we believe are infringing on our intellectual property rights if we are unable to resolve matters satisfactorily through negotiation. Litigation brought to protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could be costly, time-consuming and distracting to management and could result in the impairment or loss of portions of our intellectual property. Furthermore, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights may be met with defenses, counterclaims and countersuits attacking the validity and enforceability of our intellectual property rights. Our failure to secure, protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could harm our brand and adversely impact our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
If a third party asserts that we are infringing on its intellectual property, whether successful or not, it could subject us to costly and time-consuming litigation or expensive licenses, which could harm our business.
 
There is considerable patent and other intellectual property development activity in our industry. Our success depends, in part, upon our not infringing upon the intellectual property rights of others. Our competitors, as well as a number of other “non-practicing entities” and individuals, own or claim to own intellectual property relating to our industry and may have substantially larger and broader patent portfolios than we do. From time to time, third parties may claim that we are infringing upon their intellectual property rights, and we may be found to be infringing upon such rights. Third parties have in the past sent us correspondence regarding their intellectual property and have filed litigation against us, and in the future we may receive claims that our products infringe or violate their intellectual property rights. In this regard, in 2007, Mitel Networks Corporation, one of our competitors, filed a lawsuit against us, which was subsequently settled. Furthermore, we may be unaware of the intellectual property rights of others that may cover some or all of our technology or products. Any claims or litigation could cause us to incur significant expenses and, if successfully asserted against us, could require that we pay substantial damages or ongoing royalty payments, prevent us from selling our products, damage our reputation, or require that we comply with other unfavorable terms, any of which could materially harm our business. In addition, we may decide to pay substantial settlement costs in connection with any claim or litigation, whether or not successfully asserted against us. Even if we were to prevail, any litigation regarding our intellectual property could be costly and time-consuming and divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations.
 
Litigation with respect to intellectual property rights in the telecommunications industries is not uncommon and can often involve patent holding companies who have little or no product revenue and against whom our own patents may provide little or no deterrence. We may also be obligated to indemnify our enterprise customers or business partners in connection with any such litigation, which could further exhaust our resources. Furthermore, as a result of an intellectual property challenge, we may be required to enter into royalty, license or other agreements. We may not be able to obtain these agreements on terms acceptable to us or at all. We may have to incur substantial cost in re-designing our products to avoid infringement claims. In addition, disputes regarding our intellectual property rights may deter distributors from selling our products and dissuade potential enterprise customers from purchasing such products. As such, third-party claims with respect to intellectual property may increase our cost of goods sold or reduce the sales of our products, and may have a material and adverse effect on our business.
 
If we fail to establish and maintain proper and effective internal control over financial reporting, our operating results and our ability to operate our business could be harmed.
 
 
- 23 -

 
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 requires, among other things, that we establish and maintain internal control over financial reporting and disclosure controls and procedures. In particular, under the current rules of the SEC, we must perform system and process evaluation and testing of our internal control over financial reporting to allow management to report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Our independent registered public accounting firm is also required to report on our internal control over financing reporting. Our and our auditor’s testing may reveal deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses and render our internal control over financial reporting ineffective. We have incurred and we expect to continue to incur substantial accounting and auditing expense and expend significant management time in complying with the requirements of Section 404. If we are not able to comply with the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner, or if we and our independent registered public accounting firm identify deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses, the market price of our stock could decline and we could be subject to investigations or sanctions by the SEC, The NASDAQ Stock Market, or NASDAQ, or other regulatory authorities or subject to litigation. To the extent any material weaknesses in our internal control over financial reporting are identified in the future, we could be required to expend significant management time and financial resources to correct such material weaknesses or to respond to any resulting regulatory investigations or proceedings.
 
Changes in regulatory compliance obligations of critical suppliers may adversely impact our operations.
 
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, (Dodd-Frank Act), signed into law on July 21, 2010, includes Section 1502, which requires the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), to adopt additional disclosure requirements related to certain minerals sourced from the Democratic Republic of Congo and surrounding countries, or conflict minerals, for which such conflict minerals are necessary to the functionality of a product manufactured, or contracted to be manufactured, by an SEC reporting company. The metals covered by the proposed rules, promulgated on December 15, 2010, are commonly referred to as “3TG” and include tin, tantalum, tungsten and gold. Our suppliers may use these materials in the production processes. If the rules are adopted as proposed, in order to be able to accurately report our compliance with Section 1502, we will have to perform supply chain due diligence, third-party verification and possibly private sector audits on the sources of these metals all the way down to the mine of origin. Global supply chains are complicated, with multiple layers and suppliers between the mine and the final product. Accordingly, we could incur significant cost related to the compliance process. While the impact of Section 1502 on our business is uncertain at this time, we could potentially have difficulty in procuring needed materials from conflict-free sources and in satisfying the associated disclosure requirements when finalized by the SEC.
 
Our principal offices and the facilities of our contract manufacturers are located near known earthquake fault zones, and the occurrence of an earthquake or other catastrophic disaster could damage our facilities or the facilities of our contract manufacturers, which could cause us to curtail our operations.
 
Our principal offices, our disaster recovery site, and the facilities of one of our contract manufacturers are located in California near known earthquake fault zones and, therefore, are vulnerable to damage from earthquakes. We and our contract manufacturers are also vulnerable to damage from other types of disasters, such as power loss, fire, floods and similar events. If any disaster were to occur, our ability to operate our business could be seriously impaired. In addition, we may not have adequate insurance to cover our losses resulting from disasters or other similar significant business interruptions. Any significant losses that are not recoverable under our insurance policies could seriously impair our business and financial condition.
 
Risks Related to Ownership of Our Common Stock
 
Our stock price in the past has been volatile, and may continue to be volatile or may decline regardless of our operating performance, and investors may not be able to resell shares at or above the price at which they purchased the shares.
 
Since our stock began trading in July 2007, our stock price has fluctuated significantly, from a low of approximately $3 per share to a high of approximately $18 per share. At times the stock price has changed very quickly. For example, in January 2008, our stock price dropped from approximately $13 per share to approximately $6 per share, and as a result, we were subject to securities lawsuits which have since been settled. If investors purchase shares of our common stock, they may not be able to resell those shares at or above the price at which they purchased them. The market price of our common stock may fluctuate significantly in response to numerous factors, many of which are beyond our control, including:
 
 
                   
 
  
fluctuations in the overall stock market;
 
 
  
the financial projections we may provide to the public, any changes in these projections or our failure to meet these projections;
 
 
  
actual or anticipated fluctuations in our operating results;
 
 
  
changes in operating performance and stock market valuations of other technology companies generally, or those that sell enterprise communication products in particular;
 
 
  
changes in financial estimates by any securities analysts who follow our company, our failure to meet these estimates or failure of those analysts to initiate or maintain coverage of our stock;
 
 
  
ratings downgrades by any securities analysts who follow our company;
 
 
  
the public’s response to our press releases or other public announcements, including our filings with the SEC;
 
 
  
announcements by us or our competitors of significant technical innovations, customer wins or losses, acquisitions, strategic partnerships, joint ventures or capital commitments;
 
 
  
introduction of technologies or product enhancements that reduce the need for our products;
 
 
  
market conditions or trends in our industry or the economy as a whole;
 
 
  
lawsuits threatened or filed against us and the outcome of such lawsuits;
 
 
  
shareholder activism;
 
 
  
future sales of our common stock by our officers, directors and significant stockholders; and
 
 
  
other events or factors, including those resulting from war, incidents of terrorism or responses to these events.
 
In addition, the stock markets, and in particular the Nasdaq Global Select Market, have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have affected and continue to affect the market prices of equity securities of many technology companies. Stock prices of many technology companies have fluctuated in a manner unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of those companies. In the past, stockholders have initiated securities class action litigation following declines in stock prices of technology companies. Our current litigation is, and any future litigation may, subject us to substantial costs, divert resources and the attention of management from our business, which could harm our business and operating results.
 
Our operating results may fluctuate in the future, which could cause our stock price to decline.
 
Our historical revenues and operating results have varied from quarter to quarter. Moreover, our actual or projected operating results for some quarters may not meet our own expectations, or the expectations of stock market analysts and investors, which may cause our stock price to decline. In addition to the factors discussed elsewhere in this “Risk Factors” section, a number of factors may cause our revenue to fall short of our expectations or cause fluctuations in our operating results, including:
 
                           
 
  
adverse conditions specific to the IP telecommunications market, including decreased demand due to overall economic conditions or reduced discretionary spending by enterprises, rates of adoption of IP telecommunications systems and introduction of new standards;
 
 
  
our ability to attract and retain larger and more productive channel partners;
 
 
  
the purchasing and budgeting cycles of enterprise customers, in particular, the tendency of some customers to wait until the end of a quarter in the hopes of obtaining a better price;
 
 
  
the timing and volume of shipments of our products during a quarter, particularly as we experience an increased level of sales occurring towards the end of a quarter;
 
 
 
  
delays in purchasing decisions by our customers from one quarter to the next, or later;
 
 
  
seasonality in our target markets;
 
 
  
our ability to attract new channel partners, retain existing channel partners, and their ability to generate revenues;
 
 
  
changes in accounting rules;
 
 
  
the timing of recognition of revenue from sales to our customers;
 
 
  
changes in the mix of our products and services sold during a particular period;
 
 
  
our ability to control costs, including third-party manufacturing costs and costs of components;
 
 
  
our ability to maintain sufficient production volumes for our products from our contract manufacturers;
 
 
  
volatility in our stock price, which may lead to higher stock-based compensation expenses
 
 
  
volatility and fluctuation in foreign currency exchange rates;
 
 
  
the timing of costs related to the development or acquisition of technologies or businesses;
 
 
  
our ability to successfully expand our international operations;
 
 
  
general economic conditions or economic recession;
 
 
  
decline in interest rates on our investments; and
 
 
  
publicly-announced litigation, and the impact of such litigation on our operating results.
 
Because our operating expenses are largely fixed in the short-term, any shortfalls in revenue in a given period would have a direct and adverse effect on our operating results in that period. We believe that our quarterly and annual revenue and results of operations may vary significantly in the future and that period-to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful. You should not rely on the results of one period as an indication of future performance.
 
A substantial portion of our product orders are usually received in the last month of each fiscal quarter, with a concentration of such orders in the final two weeks of the quarter. While we typically ship products shortly after the receipt of an order, we may have orders that have not shipped at the end of any given quarter. Because the amount of such product orders may vary, the amount, if any, of such orders at the end of a particular quarter is not a reliable predictor of our future performance.
 
Because it is difficult for us to predict our quarterly operating results, period-to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be a good indication of our future performance. If, as a result of these difficulties, our revenues and operating results do not meet the expectations of our investors or securities analysts or fall below guidance we may provide to the market, the price of our common stock may decline.
 
Future sales of outstanding shares of our common stock into the market in the future could cause the market price of our common stock to drop significantly, even if our business is doing well.
 
Approximately 10% of our outstanding shares are currently held by one investor. If this investor or any existing stockholders sell or distribute a large number of shares of our common stock or the public market perceives that these sales may occur, the market price of our common stock could decline. All of our outstanding shares are freely tradable without restriction or further registration under the federal securities laws, subject in some cases to the volume, manner of sale and other limitations under Rule 144. In addition, pursuant to our investor rights agreement, some of our early investors may require us to register their shares for public sale which could result in a substantial volume of shares being sold in a short period of time. Due to these factors, sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market could occur at any time. These sales, or the perception in the market that the holders of a large number of shares intend to sell shares, could reduce the market price of our common stock.
 
 
Our charter documents and Delaware law may inhibit a takeover that stockholders consider favorable and could also limit the market price of our stock.
 
Our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws and applicable provisions of Delaware law may make it more difficult for or prevent a third party from acquiring control of us without the approval of our board of directors. These provisions:
 
               
 
  
prohibit stockholder action by written consent, thereby requiring all stockholder actions to be taken at a meeting of our stockholders;
 
 
  
limit who may call a special meeting of stockholders;
 
 
  
established a classified board of directors, so that not all members of our board of directors may be elected at one time;
 
 
  
provide our board of directors with the ability to designate the terms of and issue a new series of preferred stock without stockholder approval;
 
 
  
require the approval of two-thirds of the shares entitled to vote at an election of directors to adopt, amend or repeal our bylaws or repeal certain provisions of our certificate of incorporation;
 
 
  
allow a majority of the authorized number of directors to adopt, amend or repeal our bylaws without stockholder approval;
 
 
  
do not permit cumulative voting in the election of our directors, which would otherwise permit less than a majority of stockholders to elect directors; and
 
 
  
set limitations on the removal of directors.
 
In addition, Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law generally limits our ability to engage in any business combination with certain persons who own 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock or any of our associates or affiliates who at any time in the past three years have owned 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock. These provisions may have the effect of entrenching our management team and may deprive you of the opportunity to sell your shares to potential acquirers at a premium over prevailing prices. This potential inability to obtain a control premium could reduce the price of our common stock.
 
ITEM 1B.
UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMEN TS
 
None.
 
ITEM 2. 
PROPERTI ES
 
Our headquarters, which is located in Sunnyvale, California is a 63,781 square foot leased facility.  This lease expires in September 2014.  We also occupy leased facilities in Austin, Texas, and in Europe and Australia.
  
We maintain a shipping and warehouse facility in Fremont, California for our inventory and we rent space as needed at third-party warehouses. Our inventory is expected to be kept at our facility and at the third party facilities.
 
We believe that our current facilities are suitable and adequate to meet our current needs, and we intend to add new facilities or expand existing facilities as we add employees. We believe that suitable additional or substitute space will be available on commercially reasonable terms as needed to accommodate our operations.
 
ITEM 3.
LEGAL PROCEE DINGS
 
Information with respect to this item may be found in Note 9 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8,  which is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 4.
RESERVE D
 
ITEM 5.
MARKET FOR OUR COMMON STOCK AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MAT TERS
 
 
- 27 -

 
Market Information
 
Our common stock has been traded on The NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol “SHOR” since July 3, 2007.  Prior to that time, there was no public market for our common stock. The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the high and low sale prices of our common stock, as reported by The NASDAQ Global Select Market.
 
Year Ended June 30, 2011
 
High
   
Low
 
First Quarter
  $ 6.02     $ 4.36  
Second Quarter
    7.96       4.90  
Third Quarter
    8.99       6.50  
Fourth Quarter
    12.00       8.09  
                 
Year Ended June 30, 2010
 
High
   
Low
 
First Quarter
  $ 9.22     $ 5.86  
Second Quarter
    8.14       5.06  
Third Quarter
    6.96       5.22  
Fourth Quarter
    6.79       4.47  
 
In the past, technology stocks have experienced high levels of volatility. The trading price of our common stock may fluctuate substantially. These fluctuations could cause you to lose all or part of your investment in our common stock. Factors that could cause fluctuations in the trading price of our common stock include the following:
 
 
price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market from time to time;
 
 
significant volatility in the market price and trading volume of technology companies;
 
 
actual or anticipated changes in our results of operations or fluctuations in our operating results;
 
 
actual or anticipated changes in the expectations of investors or securities analysts;
 
 
actual or anticipated developments in our competitors’ businesses or the competitive landscape generally;
 
 
litigation involving us, our industry or both;
 
 
regulatory developments in the United States, foreign countries or both;
 
 
economic conditions and trends in our industry;
 
 
major catastrophic events;
 
 
sales of large blocks of our stock;
 
 
stock buyback programs; or
 
 
departures of key personnel.
 
In the past, following periods of volatility in the market price of a company’s securities, securities class action litigation has often been brought against that company. If our stock price is volatile, we may become the target of securities litigation. Securities litigation could result in substantial costs and divert our management’s attention and resources from our business.
 
On September 1, 2011, the last reported sales price of our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market was $6.54 per share.
 
Holders of Record
 
As of September 1, 2011, there were 108 stockholders of record of our common stock, although we believe there are approximately 1,900 beneficial owners since many brokers and other institutions hold our common stock on behalf of stockholders.
 
Dividend Policy
 
We have never declared or paid dividends on our common stock. We intend to retain any future earnings for use in our business and therefore we do not anticipate declaring or paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future.
 
 
Sales of Unregistered Securities
 
None.
 
Use of Proceeds from Public Offering of Common Stock
 
The effective date of the registration statement for our initial public offering was July 2, 2007 (Registration No. 333-140630). The proceeds from our initial public offering were primarily invested in cash, cash equivalents and short term investments and the acquisition of Agito Networks, Inc.. None of the use of the proceeds was made, directly or indirectly, to our directors, officers, or persons owning 10% or more of our common stock.
 
Stock Performance Graphs and Cumulative Total Return   (1)
 
The following graph shows the cumulative total stockholder return of an investment of $100 in cash on July 3, 2007, the date our common stock first started trading on the NASDAQ Global Select Market through June 30, 2011, for (i) our common stock, (ii) the S&P Small Cap 500 Index and (iii) the NASDAQ Telecommunications Index. Pursuant to applicable SEC rules, all values assume reinvestment of the full amount of all dividends, however no dividends have been declared on our common stock to date. The stockholder return shown on the graph below is not necessarily indicative of future performance, and we do not make or endorse any predictions as to future stockholder returns.
 
This performance graph shall not be deemed “filed” for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or the “Exchange Act,” or incorporated by reference into any filing of ours under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Exchange Act, except as shall be expressly set forth by specific reference in such filing.

 
$100 invested on 7/3/08 in stock or index.  Fiscal year ending June 30,
 
 
7/3/2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
ShoreTel, Inc.
100
36.38
65.84
38.19
83.95
S&P Small Cap 500 Index
100
83.94
61.94
70.87
92.63
NASDAQ Telecommunications Index
100
71.62
52.08
69.02
102.15
 
 

 
(1) This Section is not “soliciting material,” is not deemed “filed” with the SEC and is not to be incorporated by reference in any filing of ShoreTel, Inc. under the 1933 Act or the 1934 Act whether made before or after the date hereof and irrespective of any general incorporation language in any such filing.
 
 
 
- 29 -


Equity Compensation Plan Information
 
The following table summarizes information about our equity compensation plans as of June 30, 2011. All outstanding awards relate to our common stock.
 
Plan Category
 
Number of
Securities to be
Issued upon
Exercise of
Outstanding
Options,
Warrants and
Rights
   
Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price of
Outstanding
Options,
Warrants and
Rights
   
Number of
Securities
Remaining
Available for
Future Issuances
under Equity
Compensation
Plans (Excluding)
Securities Column 
(a)
 
   
(a)
   
(b)(2)
   
(c)
 
Equity compensation plans approved by security holders(1)
    9,127,000     $ 4.74       5,010,000  
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders
                 
Total
    9,127,000     $ 4.74       5,010,000  
 
(1)   
The number of securities remaining available for future issuance in column (c) includes 5,010,000 shares of common stock authorized and available for issuance under our 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP) and our 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (2007 Plan). The number of shares authorized for issuance under the ESPP is subject to an annual increase equal to 1% of the outstanding shares on the date of the annual increase or an amount determined by the Board of Directors and the number of shares authorized for issuance under the 2007 Plan is subject to an annual increase equal to 5% of the outstanding shares on the date of the annual increase or an amount determined by the Board of Directors. The number of securities to be issued to participants in column (a) does not include shares of common stock to be issued to participants in consideration of aggregate participant contributions under the ESPP as of June 30, 2011.
 
(2)  
The weighted average exercise price does not reflect shares subject to restricted stock awards.

 
 
- 30 -


PART II.
 
ITEM 6.
SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA
 
The following selected consolidated financial data should be read in connection with our consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected in any future period.
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
       
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
   
2008
   
2007
 
      (In thousands)  
Revenue:      
Product
  $ 159,693     $ 117,138     $ 109,555     $ 110,496     $ 87,095  
Support and services
    40,419       31,326       25,267       18,233       10,732  
Total revenue
    200,112       148,464       134,822       128,729       97,827  
Cost of revenue:
                                       
Product(1)
    52,957       40,471       38,149       37,466       29,753  
Support and services(1)
    13,688       11,580       11,048       10,036       6,847  
Total cost of revenue
    66,645       52,051       49,197       47,502       36,600  
Gross profit
    133,467       96,413       85,625       81,227       61,227  
Operating expenses:
                                       
Research and development(1)
    45,548       33,596       30,724       26,811       17,260  
Sales and marketing(1)
    74,859       55,973       44,652       37,869       26,174  
General and administrative(1)
    25,230       19,888       19,596       17,645       11,674  
Litigation settlement
    -       -       4,110       -       -  
Total operating expenses
    145,637       109,457       99,082       82,325       55,108  
Operating income (loss)
    (12,170 )     (13,044 )     (13,457 )     (1,098 )     6,119  
Other income – net
    640       84       1,141       4,101       273  
Income (loss) before income tax benefit (provision)
    (11,530 )     (12,960 )     (12,316 )     3,003       6,392  
Income tax benefit (provision)
    67       156       (343 )     (861 )     (408 )
Net income (loss)
    (11,463 )     (12,804 )     (12,659 )     2,142       5,984  
Accretion of preferred stock
    -       -       -       -       (50 )
Net  income (loss) available to common stockholders
  $ (11,463 )   $ (12,804 )   $ (12,659 )   $ 2,142     $ 5,934  
Net  income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders(2):
                                       
Basic
  $ (0.25 )   $ (0.29 )   $ (0.29 )   $ 0.05     $ 0.69  
Diluted
  $ (0.25 )   $ (0.29 )   $ (0.29 )   $ 0.05     $ 0.17  
Shares used in computing net  income (loss)  per share available to common stockholders:
                                       
Basic
    46,177       44,804       43,714       42,413       8,565  
Diluted
    46,177       44,804       43,714       44,861       35,581  
 

 (1)   Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:
 
 
      Year Ended June 30,  
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
   
2008
   
2007
 
 
   
(In thousands)
 
Cost of product revenue
  $ 123     $ 139     $ 113     $ 74     $ 14  
Cost of support and services revenue
    678       838       799       545       109  
Research and development
    3,497       3,064       2,829       2,005       420  
Sales and marketing
    3,140       3,400       3,468       2,447       581  
General and administrative
    3,741       3,213       2,549       2,360       1,659  
Total stock-based compensation expense
  $ 11,179     $ 10,654     $ 9,758     $ 7,431     $ 2,783  
 
(2)  
See Note 5 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 for a description of the method used to compute basic and diluted net income (loss) per share available to common stockholders.
 
    As of June 30,  
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
   
2008
   
2007
 
   
(In thousands)
 
Consolidated balance sheet data:
                             
Cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments
  $ 105,752     $ 115,801     $ 107,666     $ 102,811     $ 17,326  
Working capital
    109,855       112,836       111,617       111,993       23,018  
Total assets
    187,101       170,721       155,624       147,797       53,034  
Redeemable convertible preferred stock
                            56,341  
Total stockholders’ equity (deficit)
    121,424       114,466       113,772       113,213       (31,829 )
 
ITEM 7.
MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPER ATIONS
 
The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this document. This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed below. Factors that could cause or contribute to such differences include, but are not limited to, those identified below, and those discussed above in the section entitled “Risk Factors.” We report results on a fiscal year ending June 30. For ease of reference within this section, 2011 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2011, 2010 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2010, and 2009 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.
 
Overview
 
We are a leading provider of IP telecommunications solutions for enterprises. Our solution is comprised of our switches, IP phones and software applications. We were founded in September 1996 and shipped our first system in 1998. Since that time, we have continued to develop and enhance our product line. Our acquisition of Agito Networks, Inc. (“Agito”) , a leader in platform-agnostic enterprise mobility, in the second quarter of fiscal 2011, expands our existing mobile solution with the vision of allowing users to communicate on any device, such as a desk phone, mobile phone, or computer, at any location using any cellular or Wi-Fi network  simply and cost effectively.

 Our phone and switch products are manufactured by contract manufacturers located in United States and in China. Our contract manufacturers provide us with a range of operational and manufacturing services, including component procurement, final testing and assembly of our products, which allows us to scale our business without the significant capital investment and on-going expenses required to establish and maintain a manufacturing operation.
 
We sell our products primarily through channel partners that market and sell our systems to enterprises across all industries, including small, medium and large companies and public institutions. We believe our channel strategy allows us to reach a larger number of prospective enterprise customers more effectively than if we were to sell directly. The number of our authorized channel partners grew to over 900 as of June 30, 2011, representing approximately 13% year-over-year growth. Our c hannel partners typically purchase products directly from us or from our value-added distributors. Our internal sales and marketing personnel support these channel partners in their selling efforts. In some circumstances, the enterprise customer will purchase products directly from us, but in these situations we typically compensate the channel partner for its sales efforts. At the request of the channel partner, we often ship our products directly to the enterprise customer.
 
 
- 32 -

 
Most channel partners perform installation and implementation services for the enterprises that use our systems. Generally, our channel partners provide the post-contractual support to the enterprise customer by providing first-level support services and purchasing additional services from us under a post-contractual support contract. For channel partners without support capabilities or that do not desire to provide support, we offer full support contracts to provide all of the support to enterprise customers. Our channel partners may provide managed services offerings to the enterprise customer under which the channel partner may purchase our products and services and, in turn, charge the enterprise customer a monthly subscription fee to access those products and services. In addition, we have begun to engage some of our channel partners to purchase our products and services from us under a monthly managed services model.
 
During the second quarter of fiscal 2011, we entered into arrangements with two major value-added distributors to distribute our comprehensive line of business communication solutions to channel partners in the United States in what we refer to as a “two-tier” distribution model.  We believe that the two-tier distribution model allows us to better serve our existing channel partners, to reach a larger number of prospective enterprise customers more effectively and to position us to continue to build momentum and capture increased market share in the IP telephony, mobility and UC markets.  Furthermore, the two-tier distribution model allows us to scale our business operations without making significant investments in product distribution facilities, thus allowing us to manage our cost structure.  We plan to seek relationships with additional value-added distributors in the future.
 
Although, we have historically sold our systems primarily to small and medium sized enterprises, in recent years, we have been expanding our sales and marketing activities to increase our focus on larger enterprise customers, including the creation of a major accounts program whereby our sales personnel assist our channel partners to sell to large enterprise accounts. As of June 30, 2011, we had sold our products to approximately 18,000 enterprise customers, representing close to a 30% year-over-year growth.  To the extent, we continue to successfully acquire larger enterprise customers in the United States and worldwide, we expect our sales cycle to increase, and the demands on our sales and support infrastructure to increase.
 
We are headquartered in Sunnyvale, California and have sales, customer support, general and administrative and engineering functions in Austin, Texas. The majority of our personnel work at these locations. Sales, engineering, and support personnel are also located throughout the United States and, to a lesser extent, in Canada, the United Kingdom, Ireland, Germany, Belgium, Spain, Hong Kong, Singapore and Australia. While most of our customers are located in the United States, we have continued to achieve growth in revenue from international sales, which accounted for approximately 13% of our total revenue for fiscal 2011 compared with 10% and 7% in fiscal 2010 and 2009, respectively.  We expect sales to customers in the United States will continue to comprise the majority of our sales in the foreseeable future.
 
In fiscal 2011, we continued to grow our market share of the IP telephony market, both in the United States and worldwide. Our total revenue increased to $200.1 million in fiscal 2011 from $148.5 million in fiscal 2010, primarily driven by sales to new customers. Our operating expenses increased to $145.6 million in fiscal 2011 from $109.5 million in fiscal 2010, primarily due to increases in compensation expenses related to growth in headcount (including stock-based based compensation).  In fiscal 2011, we increased our headcount by 32%, with most of the growth in headcount coming from additions to our sales, product development and support workforce to support efforts to grow our sales channel and to enhance our product development activities, among other things.  The acquisition of Agito also contributed to the increase in operating expenses primarily due to increases in compensation expense associated with employees hired from Agito, as well as non-recurring acquisition related expenses.
 
Key Business Metrics
 
We monitor a number of key metrics to help forecast growth, establish budgets, measure the effectiveness of our sales and marketing efforts and to measure operational effectiveness.
 
Initial and repeat sales orders. Our goal is to attract a significant number of new enterprise customers and to encourage existing enterprise customers to purchase additional products and support. Many enterprise customers make an initial purchase and deploy additional sites at a later date, and also purchase additional products and support as their businesses expand. As our installed enterprise customer base has grown, a larger portion of orders has come from existing enterprise customers. In fiscal year 2011, order volume from existing enterprise customers represented approximately 53% of total order volume compared with 56% and 54% in fiscal 2010 and 2009, respectively.
 
 
- 33 -

 
Deferred revenue. Deferred revenue relates to the timing of revenue recognition for specific transactions based on delivery of service, support, specific commitments, product and services delivered to our value-added distributors that have not sold through to resellers, and other factors. Deferred revenue primarily consists of billings or payments received in advance of revenue recognition from our transactions and are recognized as the revenue recognition criteria are met. Nearly all system sales include the purchase of post-contractual support contracts with terms of up to five years, and our renewal rates on these contracts have been high historically. We recognize support revenue on a ratable basis over the term of the support contract. Since we receive payment for support in advance of recognizing the related revenue, we carry a deferred revenue balance on our consolidated balance sheet. This deferred revenue helps provide predictability to our future support and services revenue. Our deferred revenue balance at June 30, 2011 was $37.7 million, of which $26.4 million is expected to be recognized within one year.
 
Gross margin. Our gross margin for products is primarily affected by our ability to reduce hardware costs faster than the decline in average overall system sales prices. We strive to increase our product gross margin by reducing hardware costs through product redesign and volume discount pricing from our suppliers. In general, product gross margin on our switches is greater than product gross margin on our IP phones. As the prices and costs of our hardware components have decreased over time, our software components, which have lower costs than our hardware components, have represented a greater percentage of our overall margin on system sales. We consider our ability to monitor and manage these factors to be a key aspect of maintaining product gross margins and increasing our profitability.
 
Gross margin for support and services is slightly lower than gross margin for products, and is impacted primarily by labor-related expenses. The primary goal of our support and services function is to ensure a high level of customer satisfaction and our investments in support personnel and infrastructure are made with this goal in mind. We expect that as our installed enterprise customer base grows, we may be able to slightly improve gross margin for support and services through economies of scale. However, the timing of additional investments in our support and services infrastructure could materially affect our cost of support and services revenue, both in absolute dollars and as a percentage of support and services revenue and total revenue, in any particular period.
 
Operating expense management. Our operating expenses are comprised primarily of compensation and benefits for our employees. Accordingly, increases in operating expenses historically have been primarily related to increases in our headcount. We intend to expand our workforce to support our anticipated growth, and therefore, our ability to forecast revenue is critical to managing our operating expenses.
 
Basis of Presentation
 
Revenue. We derive our revenue from sales of our IP telecommunications systems and related support and services. Our typical system includes a combination of IP phones, switches and software applications. Channel partners buy our products directly from us or from our value-added distributors. Prices to a given channel partner for hardware and software products depend on that channel partner’s volume and customer satisfaction levels, as well as our own strategic considerations. In circumstances where we sell directly to the enterprise customer in transactions that have been assisted by channel partners, we report our revenue net of any associated payment to the channel partners that assisted in such sales. This results in recognized revenue from a direct sale approximating the revenue that would have been recognized from a sale of a comparable system through a channel partner. Product revenue has accounted for 80%, 79%, and 81% of our total revenue for 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
 
Support and services revenue primarily consists of post-contractual support, and to a lesser extent revenue from training services, professional services and installations that we perform. Post-contractual support includes software updates which grant rights to unspecified software license upgrades and maintenance releases issued during the support period. Post-contractual support also includes both Internet- and phone-based technical support. Revenue from post-contractual support is recognized ratably over the contractual service period.
 
Cost of revenue. Cost of product revenue consists primarily of hardware costs, royalties and license fees for third-party software included in our systems, salary and related overhead costs of operations personnel, freight, warranty costs and provision for excess inventory. The majority of these costs vary with the unit volumes of products sold. Cost of support and services revenue consists of salary and related overhead costs of personnel engaged in support and service activities.
 
Research and development expenses. Research and development expenses primarily include personnel costs, outside engineering costs, professional services, prototype costs, test equipment, software usage fees and facilities expenses. Research and development expenses are recognized when incurred. We capitalize development costs incurred from determination of technological feasibility through general release of the product to customers. We are devoting substantial resources to the development of additional functionality for existing products and the development of new products and related software applications. We intend to continue to make significant investments in our research and development efforts because we believe they are essential to maintaining and improving our competitive position. Accordingly, we expect research and development expenses to continue to increase in absolute dollars.
 
 
- 34 -

 
Sales and marketing expenses. Sales and marketing expenses primarily include personnel costs, sales commissions, travel, marketing promotional and lead generation programs, branding and advertising, trade shows, sales demonstration equipment, professional services fees and allocated facilities expenses.  We plan to continue to invest in development of our distribution channel by increasing the size of our field sales force to enable us to expand into new geographies and further increase our sales to large enterprise customers.  We plan to continue investing in our domestic and international marketing activities to help build brand awareness and create sales leads for our channel partners.  We expect that sales and marketing expenses will increase in absolute dollars and remain our largest operating expense category.
 
General and administrative expenses. General and administrative expenses primarily relate to our executive, finance, human resources, legal and information technology organizations. General and administrative expenses primarily consist of personnel costs, professional fees for legal, accounting, tax, compliance and information systems, travel, recruiting expense, software amortization costs, depreciation expense and facilities expenses. As we expand our business, we expect general and administrative expenses to increase in absolute dollars.
 
Other income (expense). Other income (expense) primarily consists of interest earned on cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments, gains and losses on foreign currency translations and transactions, as well as other miscellaneous items affecting our operating results.
 
Income tax benefit (provision). Income tax benefit (provision) includes federal, state and foreign tax on our income. Since our inception, we have accumulated substantial net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. We account for income taxes under an asset and liability approach.  Deferred income taxes reflect the impact of temporary differences between assets and liabilities recognized for financial reporting purposes and such amounts recognized for income tax reporting purposes, net operating loss carryforwards and other tax credits measured by applying current enacted tax laws.  Valuation allowances are provided when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to an amount that is more likely than not to be realized.
 
Use of Non-GAAP Financial Measures
 
We believe that evaluating our ongoing operating results may limit the reader’s understanding if limited to reviewing only generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) financial measures. Many investors and analysts have requested that, in addition to reporting financial information in accordance with GAAP that we also disclose certain non-GAAP information because it is useful in understanding our performance as it excludes non-cash and other non-recurring charges or credits that many investors and management feel may obscure our true operating performance. Likewise, we use these non-GAAP financial measures to manage and assess the profitability of the business and determine a portion of our employee compensation. We do not consider stock-based compensation expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and other special charges and their related tax adjustments in managing the core operations. These measures are not based on any standardized methodology prescribed by GAAP and are not necessarily comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. Non-GAAP net income (loss) is calculated by adjusting GAAP net income (loss) for stock-based compensation expense, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, special charges and their related tax effect. Non-GAAP net income (loss) per share per share is calculated by dividing Non-GAAP net income (loss) by the weighted average number of basic and diluted shares outstanding for the period. These measures should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for measures prepared in accordance with GAAP, and because these amounts are not determined in accordance with GAAP, they should not be used exclusively in evaluating our business and operations. We have provided a reconciliation of non-GAAP financial measures in the following table:
 
 
RECONCILIATION OF GAAP TO NON-GAAP FINANCIAL MEASURES
(Amounts in thousands, except per share amounts)
 
   
Year Ended June 30, 2011
   
Year Ended June 30, 2010
 
                 
(Unaudited)
                 
(Unaudited)
 
Revenue:
 
GAAP
   
Excludes
     
Non-GAAP
   
GAAP
   
Excludes
     
Non-GAAP
 
Product
  $ 159,693     $ -       $ 159,693     $ 117,138     $ -       $ 117,138  
Support and services
    40,419       -         40,419       31,326       -         31,326  
Total revenues
    200,112       -         200,112       148,464       -         148,464  
Cost of revenue
                                                   
Product
    52,957       (614 )
(a),(c)
    52,343       40,471       (139 )
(a)
    40,332  
Support and services
    13,688       (678 )
(a)
    13,010       11,580       (838 )
(a)
    10,742  
Total cost of revenue
    66,645       (1,292 )       65,353       52,051       (977 )       51,074  
Gross profit
    133,467       1,292         134,759       96,413       977         97,390  
Gross margin
    66.7 %               67.3 %     64.9 %               65.6 %
                                                     
Operating expenses:
                                                   
Research and development
    45,548       (3,497 )
(a)
    42,051       33,596       (3,064 )
(a)
    30,532  
Sales and marketing
    74,859       (3,170 )
(a),(c)
    71,689       55,973       (3,373 )
(a),(b)
    52,600  
General and administrative
    25,230       (4,266 )
(a),(b)
    20,964       19,888       (3,213 )
(a)
    16,675  
Total operating expenses
    145,637       (10,933 )       134,704       109,457       (9,650 )       99,807  
Income (loss) from operations
    (12,170 )     12,225         55       (13,044 )     10,627         (2,417 )
Other income, net
    640       -         640       84       -         84  
Income (loss) before benefit (provision) for income taxes
    (11,530 )     12,225         695       (12,960 )     10,627         (2,333 )
Income tax benefit (provision)
    67       (81 )
(d)
    (14 )     156       (195 )
(c)
    (39 )
Net income (loss)
  $ (11,463 )   $ 12,144       $ 681     $ (12,804 )   $ 10,432       $ (2,372 )
Net income (loss) per share:
                                                   
Basic
  $ (0.25 )   $ 0.26       $ 0.01     $ (0.29 )   $ 0.24       $ (0.05 )
Diluted (e)
  $ (0.25 )   $ 0.26  
 
  $ 0.01     $ (0.29 )   $ 0.24  
 
  $ (0.05 )
                                                     
Shares used in computing net loss per share:
                                                   
Basic
    46,177                 46,177       44,804                 44,804  
Diluted
    46,177                 47,900       44,804                 44,804  
 
(a)
Excludes stock-based compensation as follows:
                         
 
Cost of product revenue
  $ 123                       $ 139  
 
Cost of support and services revenue
    678                                838  
 
Research and development
    3,497                         3,064  
 
Sales and marketing
    3,140                         3,400  
 
General and administrative
    3,741                         3,213  
      $ 11,179                       $ 10,654  
                                     
(b)
Excludes severance for former Chief Executive Officer:
                           
 
General and administration
  $ 525                            
      $ 525                            
                                     
(c)
Excludes amortization of acquisition-related intangibles:
                                 
 
Cost of product revenue
  $ 491                            
 
Sales and marketing
    30                       $ (27 )
      $ 521                       $ (27 )
                                     
(d)
Excludes the tax impact of the items which are excluded in (a) to (c) above.
                                 
 
 
- 36 -

 
Results of Operations
 
The following table sets forth selected consolidated statements of operations data as a percentage of total revenue for each of the periods indicated.
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Revenue:
                 
Product
    80 %     79 %     81 %
Support and services
    20 %     21 %     19 %
Total revenue
    100 %     100 %     100 %
Cost of revenue:
                       
Product
    26 %     27 %     28 %
Support and services
    7 %     8 %     8 %
Total cost of revenue
    33 %     35 %     36 %
Gross profit
    67 %     65 %     64 %
Operating expenses:
                       
Research and development
    23 %     23 %     23 %
Sales and marketing
    37 %     38 %     33 %
General and administrative
    13 %     13 %     14 %
Litigation settlement
                3 %
Total operating expenses
    73 %     74 %     73 %
Operating loss
    (6 )%     (9 )%     (9 )%
Other income, net
                1 %
Loss before benefit from (provision for) income tax
    (6 )%     (9 )%     (8 )%
Income tax benefit (provision)
                (1 )%
Net loss
    (6 )%     (9 )%     (9 )%
 
Fiscal 2011 compared to Fiscal 2010
 
Revenue
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2011
   
2010
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Revenue
  $ 200,112     $ 148,464     $ 51,648       35 %
 
Revenue
 
Total revenue increased by $51.6 million or 35% in fiscal 2011, reflecting increases in revenues across substantially all of our IP phone systems, switches and software applications, as well as increases in revenues from support and services. Product revenue increased to $160.0 million in fiscal 2011 from $117.1 million in fiscal 2010, primarily due to higher sales volume. The increase in sales volume was primarily driven by a 29% year-over-year increase in our enterprise customer base.  We also experienced increases in sales volume and revenue from our existing enterprise customers, primarily driven by add-on sales of IP phones, switches, and software applications. The Agito acquisition, which expanded our existing mobility solution, did not significantly contribute to the growth in product revenue in fiscal 2011. However, as we continue to ramp-up our mobility efforts, we expect mobility revenue to increase in the future.
 
 
- 37 -

 
Support and services revenue increased to $40.4 million in fiscal 2011 from $31.3 million in fiscal 2010. Revenue from post-contractual support increased by approximately $8.0 million in fiscal 2011, primarily due to growth in our installed base of our customers and their contract renewals, growth in new enterprise customers, and increased add-on sales to our existing customers. These factors resulted in higher post-contractual support revenues from both the amortization of existing support contracts initiated in prior years and from renewal and new support contracts initiated in fiscal 2011. In addition, the growth in new customers contributed to a combined increase of $1.1 million in revenues from training, professional services, and installation, as these services are generally purchased in connection with the initial sale of our products to new customers.

Revenue from customers in the United States accounted for approximately 87%, 90% and 93% of total revenue for years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.

Gross margin
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2011
   
2010
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Cost of revenue
  $ 66,645     $ 52,051     $ 14,594       28 %
Gross profit
  $ 133,467     $ 96,413     $ 37,054       38 %
Gross margin
    67 %     65 %     n/a       2 %
 
Gross margin increased to 67% in fiscal 2011compared with 65% in fiscal 2010. Product gross margin improved to 67% from 65% in 2010, primarily attributable to the overall increase in revenue, favorable product mix and lower unit manufacturing costs, primarily due to overall decrease in product costs as a result of achieving product design efficiencies.  These factors were offset by amortization expenses related to purchased-intangible assets.
 
Support and services gross margin improved to 66% from 63%, primarily due to productivity gains, as the increase in support and services revenues outpaced the rate of increase in the associated costs, which largely consist of employee-related costs.
 
Operating expenses
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2011
   
2010
    $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Other income, net
  $ 640     $ 84     $ 556       662 %
Research and development
  $ 45,548     $ 33,596     $ 11,952       36 %
Sales and marketing
  $ 74,859     $ 55,973     $ 18,886       34 %
General and administrative
  $ 25,230     $ 19,888     $ 5,342       27 %
 
Research and development . Research and development expenses increased by $12.0 million or 36% in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010. The increase in research and development expenses was primarily due to an increase of $8.4 million in employee-related costs, primarily due to headcount additions to our research and development workforce, including the addition of research and development employees from Agito. In fiscal 2011, we had higher spending on various product development costs as we continued to expand our product roadmap, including an increase of $1.5 million in consulting fees and an increase of $0.4 million in both equipment expenses related to prototype development and software license expenses, partially offset by a decrease of $0.3 million in non-recurring engineering expenses. Other increases in research and development expenses were due to increases of $0.9 million in allocated facilities costs and $0.3 million in travel expenses.
 
Sales and marketing. Sales and marketing expenses increased by $18.9 million or 34% in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010, primarily due to an increase of $12.4 million in employee-related costs. In fiscal 2011, we increased our salesforce by 46% as part of our strategic focus to expand our enterprise customer base. The growth in our salesforce, coupled with the increase in total revenue in fiscal 2011, resulted in a $1.9 million or 18% increase in commission expense, which is reflected in the increase in compensation expenses. Also contributing to the increase in sales and marketing expenses were increases of $2.2 million in marketing expenses related to demand generation, channel marketing and branding activities, $2.1 million in travel-related expenses, $0.9 million in channel partner co-marketing expenses, and a combined $1.6 million increase in facilities, equipment and supplies expenses.
 
 
- 38 -

 
General and administrative . General and administrative expenses increased by $5.3 million or 27% in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010. The increase in general and administrative expenses was primarily due to an increase of $3.3 million in employee-related costs, primarily due to headcount additions to our finance and information technology workforce. In addition, we incurred approximately $0.5 million of severance costs related to our former CEO in the first quarter of 2011.  Other increases in general and administrative expenses were due to an  increase of $1.0 million in consulting and acquisition-related costs, and an  increase of $0.8 million in software license expenses, partially offset by $0.3 million decrease in other expenses.
 
Other income, net
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2011
   
2010
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Other income, net
  $ 640     $ 84     $ 556       662 %
 
Other income, net increased by $0.6 million in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010,  primarily due to an increase of approximately $0.1 million in interest income, and an  increase of approximately $0.5 million in net realized and unrealized foreign exchange gains related to accounts receivable and accounts payable denominated in foreign currencies.
 
Income tax benefit (provision)
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2011
   
2010
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Income tax benefit (provision)
  $ 67     $ 156     $ (89 )     (57 )%
 
Income tax benefit . Income tax benefit decreased by approximately $0.1 million or 57 % in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010 ,   primarily due to increases in the state and foreign income tax provisions. The state tax provision was higher in fiscal 2011 due to increases in measurable tax base for certain states that determine tax liabilities based on factors other than income.  The foreign tax provision was higher in fiscal 2011 due to higher revenue and pretax earnings by certain of our foreign subsidiaries.

Fiscal 2010 compared to Fiscal 2009
 
Revenue
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2010
   
2009
    $     %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Revenue
  $ 148,464     $ 134,822     $ 13,642       10 %
 
Revenue . The increase in total revenue in fiscal 2010 was due to increases in both product revenue and support and services revenue.  Product revenue was $117.1 million in fiscal 2010, an increase of $7.5 million or 7%, from $109.6 million in fiscal 2009, as a result of higher sales volumes of $12.5 million primarily from our U.S. telecom carrier resellers, partially offset by a slight decline in average selling prices.  Support and services revenue was $31.3 million in 2010, an increase of $6.0 million, or 24%, from $25.3 million in 2009, as a result of a $4.5 million increase in revenue associated with post-contractual support contracts, an increase of $0.5 million in professional services, $0.3 million increase in installations revenue and a $0.7 million increase in training revenue.
 
 
- 39 -

 
  Gross margin
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2010
   
2009
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Cost of revenue
  $ 52,051     $ 49,197     $ 2,854       6 %
Gross profit
  $ 96,413     $ 85,625     $ 10,788       13 %
Gross margin
    65 %     64 %     n/a       1 %
 
Gross margin . The increase in gross margin was attributable to an increase in support and services gross margin, which grew to 63% in fiscal 2010 from 56% in fiscal 2009. Product gross margin remained unchanged at 65% in fiscal 2010 and 2009. The increase in support and services gross margin was primarily due to a 24% increase in support and services revenue, while the associated costs only increased by 5% as a result of achieving greater utilization and operating efficiencies in our service and support organizations.
 
Operating expenses
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2010
   
2009
    $     %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Operating expenses:
                         
Research and development
  $ 33,596     $ 30,724     $ 2,872       9 %
Sales and marketing
  $ 55,973     $ 44,652     $ 11,321       25 %
General and administrative
  $ 19,888     $ 19,596     $ 292       1 %
Litigation settlement
  $ -     $ 4,110     $ (4,110 )     100 %
 
Research and development . Research and development expenses increased by $2.9 million or 9% in fiscal 2010 compared with fiscal 2009.  Personnel costs, including stock-based compensation, for research and development employees accounted for $2.3 million of the increase, primarily due to an increase in headcount. The increase in research and development expenses also included $0.8 million in consulting and outside services, $0.2 million in incentive compensation expense and $0.1 million in both legal expenses associated with trademark and patent costs. These increases were primarily offset by a decrease of $0.4 million in non-recurring engineering expenses and decrease of $0.1 million in equipment expenses related to beta programs.

Sales and marketing. Sales and marketing expenses increased by $11.3 million or 25% in fiscal 2010 compared with fiscal 2009. The increase in sales and marketing expense included increases of $3.8 million in advertising and promotional expenses, $2.7 million in employee-related costs due to growth in headcount, and $2.6 million in commissions as a result of increased sales volume.  Other  increases in sales and marketing expenses were primarily attributable to an increase of $1.0 million in consulting expenses and an increase of $0.9 million in travel expenses.
 
General and administrative . General and administrative expenses increased by $0.3 million or 1% in fiscal 2010 compared with fiscal 2009. Compensation, including stock-based compensation, for general and administrative employees accounted for $1.7 million of the increase. Additional increases in general and administrative expenses included $1.1 million in consulting and outside services and $0.2 million in travel expense. These increases were partially offset by a decrease of $1.3 million in legal expenses primarily due to the resolution of litigation with Mitel, and additional decreases of $1.1 million in bad debt expense and $0.4 million in restructuring related expense.
 
Litigation Settlement.   In fiscal 2009, we recorded a charge of $4.1 million as a result of an agreement to settle a dispute with Mitel. There was no such charge in fiscal 2010.
 
 
Other income
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2010
   
2009
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Other income, net
  $ 84     $ 1,141     $ (1,057 )     (93 )%
 
Other income. Other income primarily consisted of interest earned on our investment securities and foreign currency translation and transaction gains and losses. The decrease in other income was primarily due to lower interest income in fiscal 2010 compared with fiscal 2009 as a result of an overall decline in market yields in government and corporate securities.
 
Income tax benefit (provision)
 
   
Year ended
   
Change
 
   
June 30,
   
June 30,
             
   
2010
   
2009
      $       %  
   
(in thousands, except percentages)
 
Income tax benefit (provision)
  $ 156     $ (343 )   $ 499       (145 )%
 
Income tax benefit (provision). The income tax benefit was $0.2 million in fiscal 2010 as compared to an income tax provision of approximately $(0.3) million in fiscal 2009.  The income tax benefit recognized in 2010 was primarily due to the recognition of estimated tax benefit associated with carrying back current period losses to fiscal 2010 losses to fiscal 2006 to 2008 in anticipation of claiming a tax refund.  The tax expense in 2009 was primarily due to generating taxable income due to book vs. tax differences.
 
Liquidity and Capital Resources
 
Cash and Cash Equivalents and Investment
 
The following table summarizes our cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments (in thousands):
 
   
Year ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 89,695     $ 68,426     $ 73,819  
Short-term investments
    16,057       47,375       33,847  
Total
  $ 105,752     $ 115,801     $ 107,666  
 
As of June 30, 2011, our principal sources of liquidity consisted of cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of $105.8 million and net accounts receivable of $33.8 million.
 
Historically, our principal uses of cash have consisted of the purchase of finished goods inventory from our contract manufacturers, payroll and other operating expenses related to the development and marketing of our products and purchases of property and equipment.
 
We believe that our $105.8 million of cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments at June 30, 2011, together with cash flows from our operations will be sufficient to fund our operating requirements for at least the next 12 months. Our future capital requirements will depend on many factors, including our rate of revenue growth, the expansion of our sales and marketing activities, the timing and extent of our expansion into new territories, the timing of introductions of new products and enhancements to existing products, the continuing market acceptance of our products and acquisition activities. We may enter into agreements relating to potential investments in, or acquisitions of, complementary businesses or technologies in the future, which could also require us to seek additional equity or debt financing. Additional funds may not be available on terms favorable to us or at all.
 
 
- 41 -

 
The following table shows our cash flows from operating activities, investing activities and financing activities for the stated periods:
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
   
(In thousands)
 
Cash provided by operating activities
  $ 1,310     $ 11,181     $ 7,447  
Cash provided by (used in) investing activities
  $ 12,566     $ (19,743 )   $ (5,494 )
Cash provided by financing activities
  $ 7,393     $ 3,169     $ 3,194  
 
Cash flows from operating activities
 
Our cash flows from operating activities are significantly influenced by our cash expenditures to support the growth of our business in areas such as research and development, sales and marketing and administration. Our operating cash flows are also influenced by our working capital needs to support growth and fluctuations in inventory, accounts receivable, vendor accounts payable and other assets and liabilities. We procure finished goods inventory from our contract manufacturers and typically pay them in 30 days. We extend credit to our channel partners and typically collect in 30 to 60 days, although these time periods can vary and can be longer. In some cases, we prepay for license rights to third-party products which we incorporate into our products, in advance of such sales.

Cash flow provided by operating activities decreased by $9.9 million in fiscal 2011, primarily due to higher spending to support our growth, growth in inventory values, as well as factors related to timing of our cash collections and payment of our liabilities.  Cash provided by operating activities consisted of net loss of $11.5 million, adjusted by non-cash items of $16.5 million and cash used by changes in assets and liabilities of $3.6 million, which primarily consisted of (i) an increase of $9.1 million in accounts receivable, attributable to higher revenue in fiscal 2011 and timing of cash collections, (ii) increase of $8.7 million in inventory, primarily due to anticipated demand for our solutions in relation to lead times to produce such product by our contract manufacturers, as well as a purposeful build-up of inventory to mitigate any supply chain disruption resulting from the natural disaster in Japan  in March 2011 (iii) a combined decrease of $2.3 million in accounts payable, and accrued liabilities and others, partially offset by  (iv) an increase of  $8.9 million in deferred revenue, driven by higher post-contractual support billings resulting from the increase in our installed base (v) a decrease of $4.8 million in prepaid assets and other current assets, reflecting timing of expense recognition  and (vi) an increase of $2.7 million in accrued employee compensation.
 
Cash flow provided by operating activities increased by $3.7 million in fiscal 2010, primarily due to higher revenue growth and factors related to timing. Cash provided by operating activities consisted of net loss of $12.8 million, adjusted by non-cash items of  $13.7 million and cash provided by changes in assets and liabilities of $10.3 million, which primarily consisted of (i) an increase of $6.2 million in deferred revenue mainly due to the deferral of revenue from sales of post contractual support contracts exceeding the associated revenue recognized on new contracts in fiscal 2010, (ii) a net combined increase of $8.1 million in  accounts payable, accrued liabilities, and accrued employee compensation, mainly due to timing (iii) a decreases  in inventories of $1.9 million, partially offset by (iv) a $3.1 increase in accounts receivable, due to higher revenue in fiscal 2010 and timing of cash collections, and (v) a net increase of $2.8 million in prepaid expense and other assets.
 
Cash flow provided by operating activities decreased by $0.8 million in fiscal 2009, primarily due to factors related to timing. Cash used in operating activities consisted of net loss of $12.7 million, adjusted by non-cash items of $12.7 million and cash provided by changes in assets and liabilities of $7.5 million, which primarily consisted of an increase of $3.8 million in deferred revenue; and a net combined increase of $3.5 million in accounts payable, accrued liabilities, and accrued employee compensation.
 
Cash flows from investing activities
 
We have classified our investment portfolio as available for sale and our investments are made with a policy of capital preservation and liquidity as the primary objectives. We may hold investments to maturity; however, we may sell an investment at any time if the quality rating of the investment declines, the yield on the investment is no longer attractive or we are in need of cash. Because we invest only in investment securities that are highly liquid with a ready market, we believe that the purchase, maturity or sale of our investments has no material impact to our overall liquidity.
 
Net cash flow provided by investing activities was $12.6 million in fiscal 2011, primarily comprised of $33.7 million proceeds from the sales and maturities of investments, offset by $11.4 million used in the acquisition of Agito, $5.9 million used  to purchase property and equipment, $3.1 million used to purchase investment securities, and $0.8 million used to purchase intangible assets.
 
 
- 42 -

 
We used $19.7 million in investing activities in fiscal 2010, primarily comprised of $23.8 million used to purchase investment securities, $4.6 million used to purchase property and equipment and $1.4 million used to purchase intangible assets, partially offset by proceeds of $10.1 million from the sale and maturities of investments.
 
We used $5.5 million in investing activities in fiscal 2009, primarily comprised of $35.1 million used to purchase investment securities, $4.1 million used to purchase intangible assets and $1.8 million used to purchase property and equipment, partially offset by proceeds of $35.5 million from the sale and maturities of investments.
 
Cash flows from financing activities
 
Cash flow provided by financing activities in fiscal 2011 was $7.4 million, primarily consisted of  proceeds of $7.9 million from the exercise of stock options, offset by $0.5 million used to pay taxes on vested and released stock awards.
 
Cash flow provided by financing activities in fiscal 2010 was $3.2 million, primarily consisted of proceeds of $3.1 million from the exercise of stock options and $0.2 million of excess tax benefit from stock options exercised, offset by $0.1 million used to pay taxes on vested and released stock awards.
 
Cash flow provided by financing activities in fiscal 2009 was $3.2 million, primarily consisted of proceeds of $3.0 million from the exercise of stock options and $0.2 million of excess tax benefit from stock options exercised.
 
Contractual Obligations
 
The following is a summary of our contractual obligations as of June 30, 2011:
 
   
Payments Due by Period
 
   
Total
   
Less Than
   
1-3 Years
   
3-5 Years
   
Thereafter
 
         
1 Year
                   
   
(In thousands)
 
Operating lease obligations
  $ 9,158     $ 1,632     $ 3,967     $ 1,988     $ 1,571  
Software license commitments
    813       250       500       63       -  
Non-cancellable purchase commitments for finished goods
    19,860       19,860       -       -       -  
Total
  $ 29,831     $ 21,742     $ 4,467     $ 2,051     $ 1,571  
 
The table above excludes unrecognized tax benefits and related interest and penalties accrual of $0.1 million, as we are unable to reasonably predict the timing of settlement of liabilities related to unrecognized tax benefits. See Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 for a discussion of income taxes.
 
We contract with independent sources to manufacture our products and purchase components from a variety of suppliers. During the normal course of business, in order to manage future demand for our products and to ensure adequate component supply, we enter into agreements with manufacturers and suppliers which allow us to procure inventory based upon criteria and timing that we define. Certain of these purchase commitments are firm, non-cancelable, and unconditional commitments. In certain instances, these agreements allow us the option to cancel, reschedule, and adjust our requirements based on our business needs prior to firm orders being placed.
 
Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
 
We do not have any material off-balance sheet arrangements (other than those disclosed above within Contractual Obligations) nor do we have any relationships with unconsolidated entities or financial partnerships, such as entities often referred to as structured finance or special purpose entities, which are established for the purpose of facilitating off-balance sheet arrangements or other contractually narrow or limited purposes.
 
Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates
 
Our consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with GAAP. These accounting principles require us to make certain estimates and judgments that can affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the dates of the consolidated financial statements, the disclosure of contingencies as of the dates of the consolidated financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the periods presented. Although we believe that our judgments and estimates are reasonable under the circumstances, actual results may differ from those estimates.
 
 
- 43 -

 
We believe the following to be our critical accounting policies because they are important to the portrayal of our financial condition and results of operations and they require critical management judgments and estimates about matters that are uncertain:
 
 
Revenue recognition;
 
 
Allowance for doubtful accounts;
 
 
Stock-based compensation;
 
 
Inventory valuation;
 
 
Accounting for income taxes, and
 
 
Goodwill and purchased-intangible assets.
 
If actual results or events differ materially from those contemplated by us in making these estimates, our reported financial condition and results of operations for future periods could be materially affected. See Risk Factors” for certain matters that may affect our future financial condition or results of operations.
 
Revenue Recognition
 
Our revenue is related to the sale of enterprise IP telecommunications systems, which include hardware, primarily phones and voice switches, and software components and may also include training, installation and post-contractual support for the products.  Our business strategy is centered on selling to enterprise customers through channel partners and value-added distributors, rather than directly. Hence, sales transactions in most instances are ultimately made to a channel partner.  Sales to value-added distributors allow us to leverage our existing distribution infrastructure and sales personnel.  In some instances, larger enterprise customers prefer to purchase directly from us. Many of these large account sales are channel partner-assisted and we compensate the channel partner in much the same way as if the channel partner had made the sale directly. The compensation to the channel partner is recorded as an offset to the revenues associated with the direct sale to the enterprise customer.
 
The typical system includes a combination of IP phones, switches and software applications.  For sales transactions made both directly and channel partners’ revenue is recognized at the time of shipment provided that all the provisions of revenue recognition have been met.  For sales made to value-added distributors, revenue is recognized at the time of sale by the distributor, provided all the provisions of revenue recognition have been met.  We recognize product revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, product has shipped or delivery has occurred (depending on when title passes), the sales price is fixed or determinable and free of contingencies and significant uncertainties, and collection is probable. The fee is considered fixed or determinable at the execution of an agreement, based on specific products and quantities to be delivered at specified prices. The agreements with reseller partners generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. Even though substantially all of the contractual agreements with reseller partners do not provide return privileges, there are circumstances for which we will accept a return. We maintain a reserve for such returns based on historical experience. The agreements with value-added distributors allow for limited rights of return of products generally purchased within the previous 90 days. In addition to such return rights, we generally offers price protection provisions to our value-added distributors when there is a permanent reduction of our sales prices.  In such cases , we are obligated to grant the distributor a credit for the difference between the change in the aggregate price of any amounts that have been purchased but unsold by the distributor as of the effective date of such decrease. To the extent that our agreements contain acceptance terms, we recognize revenue upon product acceptance, unless the acceptance provision is deemed to be perfunctory. Payment terms to customers generally range from net 30 to net 60 days. In the event payment terms are extended materially from our standard business practices, the fees are deemed to not be fixed or determinable and revenue is recognized when the payment becomes due. We assess the ability to collect from our customers based on a number of factors, including credit worthiness and past transaction history of the customer. If the customer is not deemed credit worthy, we defer all revenue from the arrangement until payment is received and all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Shipping charges billed to customers are included in product revenue and the related shipping costs are included in cost of product revenue. Provisions for return allowances and product warranties are recorded at the time revenue is recognized based on our historical experience. The provision for return allowances is recorded as a reduction to revenues on the statement of operations and is included as a reduction to account receivables on the balance sheet.
 
Our core software, which we refer to as “essential software,” is integrated with hardware and is essential to the functionality of the integrated system product. We also sell additional software which provides increased features and functions, but is not essential to the overall functionality of the integrated system products, which we refer to as ”non-essential software.” At the initial purchase, the customer generally bundles together the hardware, essential software, non-essential software, as needed, and can elect up to five years of post-contractual support. Thereafter, if the enterprise customer increases end users and functionality, it may add more hardware, software components, and related post-contractual support by purchasing them separately. We recognize revenue related to installation services and training upon delivery of the service.
 
 
- 44 -

 
In October 2009, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) amended the accounting standards for revenue recognition to remove tangible products containing software components and non-software components that function together to deliver the product’s essential functionality from the scope of industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. In October 2009, the FASB also amended the standards for multiple deliverable revenue arrangements to:
 
 
(i)
provide updated guidance on whether multiple deliverables exist, how the deliverables in an arrangement should be separated, and how the arrangement consideration should be allocated among its elements;
 
 
(ii)
require an entity to allocate the revenue using estimated selling prices, or ESP, of the deliverables if there is no vendor specific objective evidence, or(VSOE, or third party evidence of selling price (TPE); and
 
 
(iii)
eliminate the use of the residual method and require an entity to allocate revenue using the relative selling price method.
 
The new accounting standards became applicable to us beginning the first quarter of the 2011 fiscal year. We adopted this guidance for transactions that were entered into or materially modified on or after July 1, 2010 using the prospective basis of adoption.
 
The new accounting standards do not generally change the units of accounting for our revenue transactions. Most of the products and services continue to qualify as separate units of accounting. Many of our products have both software and non-software components that function together to deliver the essential functionality of the integrated system product. We analyze all of our software and non-software products and services and consider the features and functionalities of the individual elements and the stand-alone sales of those individual components among other factors, to determine which elements are essential or non-essential to the overall functionality of the integrated system product.

For transactions entered into prior to July 1, 2010, we recognized revenue based on industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. In accordance with industry specific software revenue recognition guidance, we utilized the residual method to determine the amount of product revenue to be recognized. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements, such as post-contractual support, is deferred and the remaining portion of the arrangement consideration is recognized as product revenue. VSOE of fair value is limited to the price charged when the same element is sold separately. VSOE of fair value is established for post-contractual support based on the volume and pricing of the stand-alone sales within a narrow range. The fair value of the post-contractual support is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the related support period, which is typically one to five years.

For transactions entered into or materially modified on or after July 1, 2010, the total arrangement fees were allocated to all the deliverables based on their respective relative selling prices. The relative selling price is determined using VSOE when available. When VSOE cannot be established, we attempt to determine the TPE for the deliverables. TPE is determined based on competitor prices for similar deliverables when sold separately by the competitors. Generally our product offerings differ from those of our competitors and comparable pricing of our competitors is often not available. Therefore, we are typically not able to determine TPE. When we are unable to establish selling price using VSOE or TPE, we use ESP in our allocation of arrangement fees. The ESP for a deliverable is determined as the price at which we would transact if the products or services were sold on a stand-alone basis.
 
We have been able to establish VSOE for our professional and post contractual support services mainly based on the volume and the pricing of the stand-alone sales for these services within a narrow range. We establish our ESP for products by considering factors including, but not limited to, geographies, customer segments and pricing practices. The determination of ESP is made through consultation with and formal approval by our management. We regularly review VSOE, TPE and ESP and maintain internal controls over the establishment and updates of these estimates.
 
Our multiple element arrangements may include non-essential software deliverables that are subject to the industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. The revenue for these multiple element arrangements is allocated to the non-essential software deliverables and the non-software deliverables based on the relative selling prices of all of the deliverables in the arrangement using the hierarchy in the new revenue accounting guidance. As we have not been able to obtain VSOE for all of the non-essential software deliverables in the arrangement, revenue allocated to such non-essential software elements is recognized using the residual method in accordance with industry specific software revenue recognition guidance as we are able to obtain VSOE for the undelivered elements bundled with such non-essential software elements. Under the residual method, the amount of revenue recognized for the delivered non-essential software elements equaled the total allocated consideration less the VSOE of any undelivered elements bundled with such non-essential software elements.
 
 
- 45 -

 
Generally, we sell products directly to channel partners that market and sell our products to enterprise customers. In addition, we use value-added distributors that stock and sell our products to channel partners. We refer to this distribution approach as our two-tier distribution model.  When our solutions are sold by a distributor, revenue is recognized at the point in time in which it is sold by the distributor, which we refer to as the sell through method.

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
 
We review our allowance for doubtful accounts on a quarterly basis by assessing individual accounts receivable that materially exceed due dates. Risk assessment for these accounts includes historical collections experience with the specific account and with our similarly situated accounts coupled with other related credit factors that may evidence a risk of default and loss to us. Accordingly, the amount of this allowance will fluctuate based upon changes in revenue levels, collection of specific balances in accounts receivable and estimated changes in customer’s credit quality or likelihood of collection. If the financial condition of our channel partners were to deteriorate, resulting in an impairment of their ability to make payments, additional allowances may be required. The allowance for doubtful accounts represents management’s best estimate, but changes in circumstances, including unforeseen declines in market conditions and collection rates, may result in additional allowances in the future or reductions in allowances due to future recoveries.
 
Stock-Based Compensation
 
We measure all share-based payments to employees based on the grant date fair value of the awards and recognize these amounts in our consolidated statement of operations over the period during which the employee is required to perform services in exchange for the award (generally over the vesting period of the award). We amortize the fair value of share-based payments on a straight-line basis. We have never capitalized stock-based employee compensation cost.  Income tax benefits realized upon exercise or vesting of an award in excess of that previously recognized in earnings are presented in the consolidated statements of cash flows as a financing activity.
 
Stock-based compensation expense recognized in the consolidated statements of operations has been reduced for forfeitures since it is based on awards ultimately expected to vest. If factors change and we employ different assumptions in the application of our option-pricing model in future periods or if we experience different forfeiture rates, the compensation expense that is derived may differ significantly from what we have recorded in the current year.
 
Inventory Valuation
 
Inventories consist principally of finished goods and are stated at the lower of cost or market value, with cost being determined under a standard cost method that approximates first-in, first out. Inventory valuation reserves are established to reduce the carrying amounts of our inventories to their net estimated realizable values. Inventory valuation reserves are generally based on historical usage and expected demand. If future demand or market conditions are less favorable than our projections, additional inventory valuation reserves could be required and would be reflected in cost of product revenue in the period in which the reserves are taken. Once a reserve is established, it is maintained until the unit to which it relates is sold or scrapped.
 
  Goodwill and Purchased-Intangible Assets
           
Goodwill is tested for impairment on an annual basis during our fourth fiscal quarter and, when specific circumstances dictate, between annual tests. When impaired, the carrying value of goodwill is written down to fair value. The goodwill impairment test involves a two-step process. The first step, identifying a potential impairment, compares the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the carrying value of the reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the second step would need to be conducted; otherwise, no further steps are necessary as no potential impairment exists. The second step, measuring the impairment loss, compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. Any excess of the reporting unit goodwill carrying value over the respective implied fair value is recognized as an impairment loss. There was no impairment of goodwill identified in fiscal 2011, 2010, or 2009.
 
Purchased-intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over the periods of benefit, ranging from two to four years.  We perform a review of purchased-intangible assets whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the useful life is shorter than we had originally estimated or that the carrying amount of assets may not be recoverable. If such facts and circumstances exist, we assess the recoverability of purchased-intangible assets by comparing the projected undiscounted net cash flows associated with the related asset or group of assets over their remaining lives against their respective carrying amounts. Impairments, if any, are based on the excess of the carrying amount over the fair value of those assets. If the useful life of the asset is shorter than originally estimated, we accelerate the rate of amortization and amortize the remaining carrying value over the new shorter useful life. There was no impairment of purchased-intangible assets identified in fiscal 2011, 2010, or 2009.
 
 
Accounting for Income Taxes
 
We account for income taxes using the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Deferred income taxes are recognized by applying enacted statutory tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The measurement of deferred tax assets is reduced, if necessary, by a valuation allowance for any tax benefit of which future realization is uncertain.

In assessing the realization of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of deferred tax assets is based on several factors, including our past earnings and the scheduling of deferred taxes and projected income from operating activities. As of June 30, 2011, we do not believe it is more likely than not that the deferred tax assets relating to U.S. federal and state operations are realizable. We intend to maintain the valuation allowance until sufficient positive evidence exists to support reversal of some or all of the valuation allowance. Our income tax benefit recorded in the future will be reduced or increased in the event changes to the valuation allowance are required.
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
 
Refer to Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 for a discussion of the expected impact of recently issued accounting pronouncements.
 
ITEM7A.
QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK
 
Market Risk
 
We are exposed to various market risks, including changes in foreign currency exchange rates. Market risk is the potential loss arising from adverse changes in market rates and prices, such as foreign currency exchange and interest rates. We do not enter into derivatives or other financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes. We may enter into financial instrument contracts with major financial institutions to manage and reduce the impact of changes in foreign currency exchange rates in the future. We had no forward exchange contracts outstanding as of June 30, 2011.
 
In addition, we currently hold our investment portfolio in accounts with three financial firms. While we do not invest our cash in obligations of these firms, if these firms were to experience financial or other regulatory difficulties, it might be difficult for us to access our investments in a timely manner.
 
Interest Rate Risk
 
We maintain an investment portfolio of various holdings, types, and maturities. These securities are generally classified as available for sale and consequently, are recorded on the balance sheet at fair value with unrealized gains and losses reported as a separate component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). At any time, a sharp rise in interest rates could have a material adverse impact on the fair value of our investment portfolio. Conversely, declines in interest rates could have a material positive impact on interest earnings for our portfolio. The following table presents the hypothetical change in fair values in the financial instruments we held at June 30, 2011 that are sensitive to changes in interest rates. The modeling technique used measures the change in fair values arising from selected potential changes in interest rates on our investment portfolio, which had a fair value of $16.1 million at June 30, 2011. Market changes reflect immediate hypothetical parallel shifts in the yield curve of plus or minus 100, 50 and 25 basis points.
 
   
Decrease in interest rates
   
Increase in interest rates
 
(in thousands)
 
-100 BPS
   
-50 BPS
   
-25 BPS
   
25 BPS
   
50 BPS
   
100 BPS
 
Total fair market value
  $ 16,159     $ 16,108     $ 16,082     $ 16,031     $ 16,006     $ 15,955  
Percentage change in fair market value
    0.6 %     0.3 %     0.2 %     (0.2 )%     (0.3 )%     (0.6 )%
 
 
ITEM 8.
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DA TA
SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
   
Page
     
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
  49
Consolidated Balance Sheets
  50
Consolidated Statements of Operations
  51
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity and Comprehensive Income (Loss)
  52
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
  53
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
  54

 
 
- 48 -

 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
ShoreTel, Inc.
Sunnyvale, California
 
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”) as of June 30, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholders’ equity and comprehensive income (loss), and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2011. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the consolidated financial statements based on our audits.
 
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of June 30, 2011 and 2010, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2011, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
 
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, in the year ended June 30, 2011, the Company changed its method of recognizing revenue for multiple element arrangements in accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board’s Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2009-13, Multiple-Deliverable Revenue Arrangements and ASU 2009-14, Certain Revenue Arrangements that include Software Elements .
 
We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2011, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated September 12, 2011 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
 
/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Jose, California
September  12, 2011
 
 
SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
C ONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(Amounts in thousands, except per share amounts)
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
ASSETS
           
Current assets:
           
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 89,695     $ 68,426  
Short-term investments
    16,057       47,375  
Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $737 and $876 as of June 30, 2011 and 2010, respectively
    33,812       24,596  
Inventories
    19,062       10,300  
Prepaid expenses and other current assets
    3,540       7,779  
Total current assets
    162,166       158,476  
Property and equipment - net
    8,236       6,019  
Goodwill
    7,415       -  
Intangible assets
    8,570       5,025  
Other assets
    714       1,201  
Total assets
  $ 187,101     $ 170,721  
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
               
Current liabilities:
               
Accounts payable
  $ 6,394     $ 7,868  
Accrued liabilities and other
    8,533       10,061  
Accrued employee compensation
    11,022       8,261  
Deferred revenue
    26,362       19,450  
Total current liabilities
    52,311       45,640  
                 
Long-term deferred revenue
    11,321       9,269  
Other long-term liabilities
    2,045       1,346  
Total liabilities
    65,677       56,255  
Commitments and contingencies (Note 10)
               
Stockholders' equity:
               
Preferred stock, par value $.001 per share, authorized 5,000 shares; none issued and outstanding
           
Common stock and additional paid-in capital, par value $.001 per share, authorized 500,000; issued and outstanding, 47,455 and 45,370 shares as of June 30, 2011 and June 30, 2010, respectively
    241,063       222,491  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    40       191  
Accumulated deficit
    (119,679 )     (108,216 )
Total stockholders’ equity
    121,424       114,466  
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
  $ 187,101     $ 170,721  
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements
 
 
SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
C ONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
   
(Amounts in thousands, except per share amounts)
 
Revenue:
                 
Product
  $ 159,693     $ 117,138     $ 109,555  
Support and services
    40,419       31,326       25,267  
Total revenue
    200,112       148,464       134,822  
Cost of revenue:
                       
Product
    52,957       40,471       38,149  
Support and services
    13,688       11,580       11,048  
Total cost of revenue
    66,645       52,051       49,197  
Gross profit
    133,467       96,413       85,625  
Operating expense:
                       
Research and development
    45,548       33,596       30,724  
Sales and marketing
    74,859       55,973       44,652  
General and administrative
    25,230       19,888       19,596  
Litigation settlement
    -       -       4,110  
Total operating expenses
    145,637       109,457       99,082  
Loss from operations
    (12,170 )     (13,044 )     (13,457 )
Other income (expense):
                       
Interest income
    498       408       1,399  
Other  income (expense), net
    142       (324 )     (258 )
Total other income (expense)
    640       84       1,141  
Loss before income tax benefit (provision)
    (11,530 )     (12,960 )     (12,316 )
Income tax benefit (provision)
    67       156       (343 )
Net loss
  $ (11,463 )   $ (12,804 )   $ (12,659 )
Net loss per common share, basic and diluted
  $ (0.25 )   $ (0.29 )   $ (0.29 )
Shares used in computing net loss per common share, basic and diluted
    46,177       44,804       43,714  
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements
 
 
SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)
 
   
Common Stock and Additional Paid-In-Capital
   
Deferred
Stock
Compensation
   
Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
   
Accumulated
Deficit
   
Total
Stockholders’
Equity
 
   
Shares
   
Amount
                 
   
(Amounts in thousands)
 
                                     
BALANCE – July 1, 2008
    43,341     $ 196,184     $ (142 )   $ (76 )   $ (82,753 )   $ 113,213  
Common stock issued under stock-based compensation plans , net of taxes
    1,021       3,004                               3,004  
Stock-based compensation expense
            9,670       88                       9,758  
Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options
            54                               54  
Income tax benefit related to stock option exercises
            190                               190  
Components of comprehensive income:
                                               
Unrealized gain on short-term investments, net
                            212               212  
Net loss
                                    (12,659 )     (12,659 )
Comprehensive loss
                                            (12,447 )
                                                 
BALANCE - June 30, 2009
    44,362       209,102       (54 )     136       (95,412 )     113,772  
Common stock issued under stock-based compensation plans , net of taxes
    1,008       2,978                               2,978  
Stock-based compensation expense
            10,600       54                       10,654  
Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options
            18                               18  
Income tax benefit related to stock option exercises
            (207 )                             (207 )
Components of comprehensive income:
                                               
Unrealized gain on short-term investments, net
                            55               55  
Net loss
                                    (12,804 )     (12,804 )
Comprehensive loss
                                            (12,749 )
                                                 
BALANCE - June 30, 2010
    45,370       222,491       -       191       (108,216 )     114,466  
Common stock issued under stock-based compensation plans , net of taxes
    2,085       7,393                               7,393  
Stock-based compensation expense
            11,179                               11,179  
Components of comprehensive income:
                                               
Unrealized loss on short-term investments, net
                            (151 )             (151 )
Net loss
                                    (11,463 )     (11,463 )
Comprehensive loss
                                            (11,614 )
                                                 
BALANCE - June 30, 2011
    47,455     $ 241,063     $ -     $ 40     $ (119,679 )   $ 121,424  
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements
 
 
SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
C ONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
   
(In thousands)
 
Cash flows from operating activities:
                 
Net loss
  $ (11,463 )   $ (12,804 )   $ (12,659 )
Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Depreciation and amortization
    4,664       2,804       1,965  
Amortization of premium on investments
    610       217       27  
Stock-based compensation expense
    11,179       10,654       9,758  
Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised
    -       (191 )     (190 )
Loss on disposal of property and equipment and other assets
    97       340       191  
Deferred tax benefit
    -       (26 )     -  
Provision (benefit) for doubtful accounts receivable
    -       (83 )     1,066  
Changes in assets and liabilities, net of the effect of acquisition:
                       
Accounts receivable
    (9,156 )     (3,059 )     (611 )
Inventories
    (8,701 )     1,851       203  
Prepaid expenses and other current assets
    4,299       (4,022 )     480  
Other assets
    520       1,179       (85 )
Accounts payable
    (1,333 )     (325 )     1,796  
Accrued liabilities and other
    (929 )     5,052       2,332  
Accrued employee compensation
    2,654       3,366       (652 )
Deferred revenue
    8,869       6,228       3,826  
Net cash provided by operating activities
    1,310       11,181       7,447  
                         
Cash flows from investing activities:
                       
Purchases of property and equipment
    (5,883 )     (4,650 )     (1,842 )
Purchases of investments
    (3,136 )     (23,835 )     (35,087 )
Proceeds from sale/maturities of investments
    33,694       10,145       35,558  
Purchase of software licenses, patents and other intangible assets
    (770 )     (1,403 )     (4,123 )
Proceeds from sale of property and equipment
    36       -       -  
Acquisition of business, net of cash acquired
    (11,375 )     -       -  
Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities
    12,566       (19,743 )     (5,494 )
                         
Cash flows from financing activities:
                       
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
    7,915       3,103       3,004  
Taxes paid on vested and released stock awards
    (522 )     (125 )     -  
Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised
    -       191       190  
Net cash provided by financing activities
    7,393       3,169       3,194  
                         
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
    21,269       (5,393 )     5,147  
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
    68,426       73,819       68,672  
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
  $ 89,695     $ 68,426     $ 73,819  
                         
Supplemental cash flow disclosure:
                       
Cash paid (refunds received) for taxes
  $ (2,105 )   $ (156 )   $ 1,196  
                         
Noncash financing and investing activities:
                       
Unpaid portion of property and equipment purchases included in period-end accounts payable
  $ 191     $ 647     $ 196  
Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options
  $ -     $ 18     $ 54  
Unpaid portion of purchases of other assets included in period-end accounts payable and accrued liabilities
  $ -     $ -     $ 215  
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements
 

SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
N OTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
1. THE COMPANY AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
The Company - ShoreTel, Inc. was incorporated in California on September 17, 1996 and reincorporated in Delaware on June 22, 2007. ShoreTel, Inc. and its subsidiaries (referred herein as “the Company”) is a leading provider of pure Internet Protocol, or IP, unified communications systems for enterprises. The Company’s systems are based on its distributed software architecture and switch-based hardware platform which enable multi-site enterprises to be served by a single telecommunications system. The Company’s systems enable a single point of management, easy installation and a high degree of scalability and reliability, and provide end users with a consistent, full suite of features across the enterprise, regardless of location. As a result, management believes that the Company’s systems enable enhanced end user productivity and provide lower total cost of ownership and higher customer satisfaction than alternative systems.
 
Fiscal Year End - The Company operates on a fiscal year ending June 30.
 
Principles of Consolidation - The accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company’s wholly owned subsidiaries located in Germany, the United Kingdom, Singapore and Australia. All transactions and balances between the parent and the subsidiaries have been eliminated in consolidation. The functional currency of the subsidiaries is the U.S. dollar. Functional currency monetary assets and liabilities are translated at the rates of exchange on the balance sheet date, and local currency revenues and expenses are translated at average rates of exchange during the period. Gains and losses resulting from the process of remeasuring foreign currency financial statements into U.S. dollars are included in other income (expense).
 
Reclassifications - Certain reclassifications have been made to the previous periods to conform to fiscal 2011 presentation, including a reclassification of $0.3 million of finished goods inventory held by distributors from Prepaid and other current assets to Inventories on the consolidated balance sheet at June 30, 2010.  These reclassifications had no effect on the Company's total assets, total liabilities, results of operations or cash flows.
 
Use of Estimates - The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The use of estimates are included in certain areas including revenue recognition, allowance for doubtful accounts, stock-based compensation, inventory and other assets valuation, accounting for income taxes and accounting for goodwill and purchased intangible assets.  Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
Concentration of Credit Risk - Financial instruments, which potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk, consist principally of cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments and accounts receivable. As of June 30, 2011, substantially all of the Company’s cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments were managed by multiple financial institutions. Accounts receivable are typically unsecured and are derived from revenue earned from customers. The Company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers and maintains allowances for potential credit losses. At June 30, 2011 and 2010, no enterprise customer, channel partner or distributor accounted for more than 10% of total accounts receivable. For the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010, and 2009, no enterprise customer, channel partner or distributor accounted for more than 10% of total revenue.
 
Fair Value of Financial Instruments - The carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and accrued liabilities, approximate their respective fair market values due to the short maturities of these financial instruments. Refer to Note 5 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for discussion of the methods used to determine the fair value of short-term investments.
 
Cash and Cash Equivalents - The Company considers all highly liquid investments purchased with an original or remaining maturity of less than three months at the date of purchase to be cash equivalents.  The Company’s cash and cash equivalents are maintained with various financial institutions.
 
Investments - The Company’s short-term investments are comprised of U.S. Government agency securities, corporate notes and commercial paper. These investments are held in the custody of three major financial institutions. The specific identification method is used to determine the cost basis of disposed fixed income securities. At June 30, 2011 and 2010, the Company’s investments were classified as available-for-sale. These investments are recorded in the Consolidated Balance Sheets at fair value with unrealized gains or losses reported as a separate component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax.
 
 
- 54 -

 
The Company recognizes an impairment charge when a decline in the fair value of its investments is considered to be other-than-temporary.  An impairment is considered other-than-temporary if (i) the Company has the intent to sell the security, (ii) it is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell the security before recovery of its entire amortized cost basis, or (iii) the Company does not expect to recover the entire amortized cost of the security. If an impairment is considered other-than-temporary based on (i) or (ii) described above, the entire difference between the amortized cost and the fair value of the security is recognized in earnings. If an impairment is considered other-than-temporary based on condition (iii), the amount representing credit losses, defined as the difference between the present value of the cash flows expected to be collected and the amortized cost basis of the debt security, will be recognized in earnings and the amount relating to all other factors will be recognized in other comprehensive income (OCI). In estimating the amount and timing of cash flows expected to be collected, the Company considers all available information including past events, current conditions, the remaining payment terms of the security, the financial condition of the issuer, expected defaults, and the value of underlying collateral.
 
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts - The Company records an allowance for doubtful accounts based upon its assessment of various factors. The Company considers historical experience, the age of the accounts receivable balances, the credit quality of its customers, current economic conditions and other factors that may affect customers’ ability to pay to determine the level of allowance required.
 
The change in allowance for doubtful accounts is summarized as follows (in thousands):
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Allowance for doubtful accounts - beginning
  $ 876     $ 1,330     $ 414  
Current period provision (benefit)
    -       (83 )     1,066  
Write-offs charged to allowance (net of recoveries)
    (139 )     (371 )     (150 )
Allowance for doubtful accounts - ending
  $ 737     $ 876     $ 1,330  
 
Inventories - Inventories, which consist principally of raw materials, finished goods and inventories held by distributors are stated at the lower of cost or market, with cost being determined under a standard cost method that approximates first-in, first-out.
 
Property and Equipment - Property and equipment are stated at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, which range from two to five years. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of the estimated useful lives of the asset or the lease term.
 
Goodwill and Purchased-Intangible Assets - Goodwill is tested for impairment on an annual basis during the Company’s fourth fiscal quarter and, when specific circumstances dictate, between annual tests. When impaired, the carrying value of goodwill is written down to fair value. The Company has one reporting unit. The goodwill impairment test involves a two-step process. The first step, identifying a potential impairment, compares the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the carrying value of the reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the second step would need to be conducted; otherwise, no further steps are necessary as no potential impairment exists. The second step, measuring the impairment loss, compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. Any excess of the reporting unit goodwill carrying value over the respective implied fair value is recognized as an impairment loss. There was no impairment of goodwill identified in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009.
 
Purchased-intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over the periods of benefit, ranging from two to four years. The Company performs a review of purchased-intangible assets whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the useful life is shorter than it had originally estimated or that the carrying amount of assets may not be recoverable. If such facts and circumstances exist, the Company assesses the recoverability of purchased-intangible assets by comparing the projected undiscounted net cash flows associated with the related asset or group of assets over their remaining lives against their respective carrying amounts. Impairments, if any, are based on the excess of the carrying amount over the fair value of those assets. If the useful life of the asset is shorter than originally estimated, the Company accelerates the rate of amortization and amortizes the remaining carrying value over the new shorter useful life. There was no impairment of purchased-intangible assets identified in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009.
 
Long-Lived Assets  - The Company evaluates the carrying value of long-lived assets to be held and used including intangible assets, when events or circumstances warrant such a review. The carrying value of a long-lived asset to be held and used is considered impaired when the anticipated separately identifiable undiscounted cash flows from such an asset are less than the carrying value of the asset. In that event, an impairment loss is recognized based on the amount by which the carrying value exceeds the fair value of the long-lived asset. Fair value is determined primarily using the anticipated cash flows discounted at a rate commensurate with the risk involved.
 
 
- 55 -

 
Revenue Recognition - The Company’s revenue is related to the sale of enterprise IP telecommunications systems, which include hardware, primarily phones and voice switches, and software components and may also include training, installation and post-contractual support for the products. The Company’s business strategy is centered on selling to enterprise customers through channel partners and value-added distributors, rather than directly. Hence, sales transactions in most instances are ultimately made to a channel partner.  Sales to value-added distributors allow the Company to leverage its existing distribution infrastructure and sales personnel.  In some instances, larger enterprise customers prefer to purchase directly from the Company.  Many of these large account sales are channel partner-assisted and the Company compensates the channel partner in much the same way as if the channel partner had made the sale directly. The compensation to the channel partner is recorded as an offset to the revenues associated with the direct sale to the enterprise customer.
 
The typical system includes a combination of IP phones, switches and software applications.  For sales transactions made both directly and channel partners and distributors revenue is recognized at the time of shipment provided that all the provisions of revenue recognition have been met.  For sales made to value-added distributors, revenue is recognized at the time of sale by the distributor, provided all the provisions of revenue recognition have been met.  We recognize product revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, product has shipped or delivery has occurred (depending on when title passes), the sales price is fixed or determinable and free of contingencies and significant uncertainties, and collection is probable. The fee is considered fixed or determinable at the execution of an agreement, based on specific products and quantities to be delivered at specified prices. The agreements with reseller partners generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. Even though substantially all of the contractual agreements do not provide return privileges, there are circumstances for which the Company will accept a return.The Company maintains a reserve for such returns based on historical experience with reseller partners. The agreements with the Company’s value-added distributors allow for limited rights of return of products generally purchased within the previous 90 days.  In addition to such return rights, the Company generally offers price protection provisions to its distributors when there is a permanent reduction of its sales prices.  In such cases , the Company is obligated to grant the distributor a credit for the difference between the change in the aggregate price of any amounts that have been purchased but unsold by the distributor as of the effective date of such decrease. To the extent that the Company’s agreements contain acceptance terms, the Company recognizes revenue upon product acceptance, unless the acceptance provision is deemed to be perfunctory. Payment terms to customers generally range from net 30 to net 60 days. In the event payment terms are extended materially from the Company’s standard business practices, the fees are deemed to not be fixed or determinable and revenue is recognized when the payment becomes due. The Company assesses the ability to collect from its customers based on a number of factors, including credit worthiness and past transaction history of the customer. If the customer is not deemed credit worthy, the Company defers all revenue from the arrangement until payment is received and all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Shipping charges billed to customers are included in product revenue and the related shipping costs are included in cost of product revenue. Provisions for return allowances and product warranties are recorded at the time revenue is recognized based on the Company’s historical experience. The provision for return allowances is recorded as a reduction to revenues on the statement of operations and is included as a reduction to accounts receivable on the balance sheet.
 
The Company’s core software, which we refer to as  “essential software,” is integrated with hardware and is essential to the functionality of the integrated system product. The Company also sells additional software which provides increased features and functions, but is not essential to the overall functionality of the integrated system products, which we refer to as  “non-essential software.” At the initial purchase, the customer generally bundles together the hardware, essential software, non-essential software, as needed, and up to five years of post-contractual support. Thereafter, if the enterprise customer increases end users and functionality, it may add more hardware, software components, and related post-contractual support by purchasing them separately. The Company recognizes revenue related to installation services and training upon delivery of the service.
 
Generally, the Company sells products directly to channel partners that market and sell its products to enterprise customers. In addition, the Company uses value-added distributors that stock and sell its products to channel partners. The Company refers to this distribution approach as its two-tier distribution model.  When the Company’s solutions are sold by a distributor, revenue is recognized at the point in time in which it is sold by the distributor, which we refer to as the sell through method.

The Company has arrangements with its channel partners under which the Company reimburses the resellers for cooperative marketing costs meeting specified criteria. The reimbursements are limited to 50% of the actual costs charged to the channel partners by third-party vendors for advertising, trade show activities and other related sales and marketing activities for which the Company receives an identifiable benefit (goods and services that the Company could have purchased directly from third-party vendors), subject to a limit of the total cooperative marketing allowance earned by each channel partner. The Company records the reimbursements to the channel partners meeting such specified criteria within sales and marketing expenses on the consolidated statements of operations, and maintains estimated accruals and allowances for these programs.
 
 
- 56 -

 
 In October 2009, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2009-13 (“ASU 2009-13”), which amended the accounting standards for revenue recognition to remove tangible products containing software components and non-software components that function together to deliver the product’s essential functionality from the scope of industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. In addition, in October 2009, the FASB issued ASU 2009-14, which:
 
(i) 
provide updated guidance on whether multiple deliverables exist, how the deliverables in an arrangement should be separated, and how the arrangement consideration should be allocated among its elements;
(ii)
require an entity to allocate the revenue using estimated selling prices (ESP) of the deliverables if there is no vendor specific objective evidence (VSOE) or third party evidence of selling price (TPE); and
(iii)
eliminate the use of the residual method and require an entity to allocate revenue using the relative selling price method.
 
The new accounting standards became applicable to the Company beginning the first quarter of its 2011 fiscal year. The Company adopted this guidance for transactions that were entered into or materially modified on or after July 1, 2010 using the prospective basis of adoption.
 
The new guidance does not generally change the units of accounting for the Company’s revenue transactions. Most of the products and services continue to qualify as separate units of accounting. Many of the Company’s products have both software and non-software components that function together to deliver the essential functionality of the integrated system product. The Company analyzes all of its software and non-software products and services and considers the features and functionalities of the individual elements and the stand alone sales of those individual components among other factors, to determine which elements are essential or non-essential to the overall functionality of the integrated system product.
 
For transactions entered into prior to July 1, 2010, the Company recognized revenue based on industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. In accordance with industry specific software revenue recognition guidance, the Company utilized the residual method to determine the amount of product revenue to be recognized. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements, such as post-contractual support, is deferred and the remaining portion of the arrangement consideration is recognized as product revenue. VSOE of fair value is limited to the price charged when the same element is sold separately. VSOE of fair value is established for post-contractual support based on the volume and pricing of the stand-alone sales within a narrow range. The fair value of the post-contractual support is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the related support period, which is typically one to five years.
 
For transactions entered into or materially modified on or after July 1, 2010, the total arrangement fees were allocated to all the deliverables based on their respective relative selling prices. The relative selling price is determined using VSOE when available. When VSOE cannot be established, the Company attempts to determine the TPE for the deliverables. TPE is determined based on competitor prices for similar deliverables when sold separately by the competitors. Generally the Company’s product offerings differ from those of its competitors and comparable pricing of its competitors is often not available. Therefore, the Company is typically not able to determine TPE. When the Company is unable to establish selling price using VSOE or TPE, the Company uses ESP in its allocation of arrangement fees. The ESP for a deliverable is determined as the price at which the Company would transact if the products or services were sold on a stand-alone basis.
 
The Company has been able to establish VSOE for its professional and post contractual support services mainly based on the volume and the pricing of the stand-alone sales for these services within a narrow range. The Company establishes its ESP for products by considering factors including, but not limited to, geographies, customer segments and pricing practices. The determination of ESP is made through consultation with and formal approval by the Company’s management. The Company regularly reviews VSOE, TPE and ESP and maintains internal controls over the establishment and updates of these estimates.
 
The Company’s multiple element arrangements may include non-essential software deliverables that are subject to the industry specific software revenue recognition guidance. The revenue for these multiple element arrangements is allocated to the non-essential software deliverables and the non-software deliverables based on the relative selling prices of all of the deliverables in the arrangement using the hierarchy in the new revenue accounting guidance. As the Company has not been able to obtain VSOE for all of the non-essential software deliverables in the arrangement, revenue allocated to such non-essential software elements is recognized using the residual method in accordance with industry specific software revenue recognition guidance as the Company was able to obtain VSOE for the undelivered elements bundled with such non-essential software elements. Under the residual method, the amount of revenue recognized for the delivered non-essential software elements equaled the total allocated consideration less the VSOE of any undelivered elements bundled with such non-essential software elements.

 
- 57 -

 
Total revenue as reported and pro forma total revenue that would have been reported for the year ended June 30, 2011, if the transactions entered into or materially modified on or after July 1, 2010 were subject to previous accounting guidance, are shown in the following table (in thousands):
 
   
Year ended June 30, 2011
 
   
As Reported
   
Pro Forma
Basis as if
The Previous
Accounting
Guidance were
in  Effect
   
Impact of
adoption
of the
Accounting
Standards
Updates
 
Revenue
                 
Product
  $ 159,693     $ 159,418     $ 275  
Support and services
    40,419       40,419       -  
Total revenue
  $ 200,112     $ 199,837     $ 275  
Deferred revenue
  $ 37,683     $ 37,958     $ (275 )

The impact to total revenue for the year ended June 30, 2011 of the new revenue accounting guidance was primarily to increase product revenues by $0.3 million .
 
The new accounting guidance for revenue recognition did not have a significant effect on total revenues in periods after the initial adoption when applied to multiple element arrangements due to the existence of VSOE for most of the Company’s service offerings which remain undelivered after the software and non-software tangible products are delivered at the inception of the arrangement. The Company’s future revenue recognition for multiple element arrangements is not expected to differ materially from the results in the current period. However, as the Company’s marketing and product strategies evolve, the Company may modify its pricing practices in the future, which could result in changes in selling prices, including both VSOE and ESP which could impact future revenues. As a result, the Company’s future revenue recognition for multiple elements arrangements could differ materially from the results in current period.

Warranties - The majority of the Company’s products are covered by a one-year limited manufacturer’s warranty. Estimated contractual warranty obligations are recorded when related sales are recognized based on historical experience. The determination of such provision requires the Company to make estimates of product return rates and expected costs to repair or replace the product under warranty. If actual costs differ significantly from these estimates, additional amounts are recorded when such costs are probable and can be reasonably estimated. The provisions for product warranties are recorded within cost of goods sold on the statement of operations and included within accrued liabilities and other on the balance sheet.
 
The change in accrued warranty expense is summarized as follows (in thousands):
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Accrued warranty balance - beginning
  $ 315     $ 261     $ 239  
Current period accrual
    160       330       292  
Warranty expenditures charged to accrual
    (66 )     (276 )     (270 )
Accrued warranty balance - ending
  $ 409     $ 315     $ 261  
 
Research and Development Costs - Research and development expenditures, which include software development costs, are expensed as incurred. Software development costs incurred subsequent to the time a product’s technological feasibility has been established through the time the product is available for general release to customers are subject to capitalization.
 
 
Income Taxes – The Company utilizes the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Deferred income taxes are recognized by applying enacted statutory tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The measurement of deferred tax assets is reduced, if necessary, by a valuation allowance for any tax benefit of which future realization is uncertain.

Stock-Based Compensation – The Company measures the cost of employee services received in exchange for an award of equity instruments based on the grant date fair value of the award.  The Company has a stock-based employee compensation plan (Option Plan). Generally, stock options granted to employees vest 25% one year or 50% two years from the grant date and 1/48 each month thereafter, and have a term of ten years.
 
The following table shows total stock-based compensation expense included in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009 (in thousands):
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Cost of product revenue
  $ 123     $ 139     $ 113  
Cost of support and services revenue
    678       838       799  
Research and development
    3,497       3,064       2,829  
Sales and marketing
    3,140       3,400       3,468  
General and administrative
    3,741       3,213       2,549  
Total stock-based compensation expense
  $ 11,179     $ 10,654     $ 9,758  
 
Compensation expense related to equity instruments issued to nonemployees is recognized as the equity instruments vest.  At each reporting date, the Company revalues the compensation.  As a result, stock-based compensation expense related to unvested equity instruments issued to nonemployees fluctuates as the fair value of the Company’s common stock fluctuates. The Company uses the Black-Scholes option-pricing model to value options granted to non-employees, and the related expense is recognized over the period in which the related services are received.
 
Foreign currency translation - The Company’s foreign operations are subject to exchange rate fluctuations and foreign currency transaction costs, however, the majority of sales transactions are denominated in U.S. dollars. Foreign currency denominated sales, costs and expenses are recorded at the average exchange rates during the year. Gains or losses resulting from foreign currency transactions are included in other income on the consolidated statements of operations.
 
Comprehensive income (loss) - Comprehensive income (loss) is defined as the change in equity during a period from non-owner sources. Comprehensive income (loss) consists of net income (loss) and other comprehensive income (loss), which is a separate component of stockholders’ equity. Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) only includes unrealized gains and losses on the Company’s available-for-sale securities. Other comprehensive income (loss) for fiscal years 2011, 2010 and 2009 is disclosed within the consolidated statements of stockholders’ equity and comprehensive income (loss).
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
 
In May 2011, the FASB issued ASU No. 2011-04 , Fair Value Measurement (Topic 820): Amendments to Achieve Common Fair Value Measurement and Disclosure Requirements in GAAP and IFRSs . This ASU represents the converged guidance of the FASB and the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) on fair value measurement and is intended to result in common requirements for measuring fair value and for disclosing information about fair value measurements, including a consistent meaning of the term “fair value.” The amendments in ASU 2011-04 are effective for public entities for interim and fiscal year beginning after December 15, 2011, and should be applied prospectively. Early adoption is not permitted for public entities. The guidance is limited to enhanced disclosures, and it is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

In June 2011, the FASB issued ASU No. 2011-05, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220): Presentation of Comprehensive Income . This ASU increases the prominence of other comprehensive income ("OCI") in the financial statements and provides companies two options for presenting OCI, which until now has typically been placed within the statement of shareholders’ equity and comprehensive income (loss). One option allows an OCI statement to be included with the net income statement, and together the two will make a statement of total comprehensive income.  Alternatively, companies may present an OCI statement separate from the net income statement; however, the two statements will have to appear consecutively within a financial report.  This ASU does not affect the types of items that are reported in OCI, nor does it affect the calculation or presentation of earnings per share.  For public entities, the amendments are effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2011. The Company’s adoption of this standard is not expected to have a material impact on its financial statements.

 
- 59 -

 
2. Business Combination
 
On October 19, 2010, the Company acquired Agito Networks, Inc. (“Agito”), a leader in platform-agnostic enterprise mobility, for total cash consideration of $11.4 million. The acquisition of Agito expands and enhances the Company’s product offering by adding Agito’s mobility solution to the Company’s existing range of products, software and services. In accordance with ASC 805, Business Combinations , the total consideration paid for Agito was first allocated to the net tangible assets acquired based on the estimated fair values of the assets at the acquisition date.  The excess of the fair value of the consideration paid over the fair value of Agito’s net tangible and identifiable intangible assets acquired resulted in the recognition of goodwill of approximately $7.4 million, primarily related to expected synergies to be achieved in connection with the acquisition. The goodwill recognized is deductible for income tax purposes. The table below shows the allocation of the purchase price to tangible and intangible assets and liabilities assumed (in thousands):

Tangible assets
  $ 261  
Goodwill
    7,415  
Intangible assets
    4,220  
Liabilities assumed
    (521 )
    $ 11,375  
 
The Company recorded revenues of $0.7 million for year ended June 30, 2011 from the mobility solutions products acquired from Agito. The Company has integrated the mobility solutions business into its own business operations, and therefore, unable to report expenses or earnings related to the acquired business. The unaudited pro forma financial information in the table below summarizes the combined results of operations for the Company and Agito as though the companies were combined as of the beginning of fiscal year 2010. The pro forma financial information for all periods presented also includes the business combination accounting effects resulting from the acquisition, including amortization charges from acquired intangible assets, adjustments to interest expenses for certain borrowings and exclusion of acquisition-related expenses and their related tax effects as though the companies were combined as of the beginning of fiscal year 2010. The pro forma financial information as presented below is for informational purposes only and is not indicative of the results of operations that would have been achieved if the acquisition had taken place at the beginning of fiscal year 2010.

   
Year Ended June 30,
 
(In thousands, except per share amounts )            
   
(Unaudited)
   
(Unaudited)
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
Total revenue
  $ 200,555     $ 149,958  
Net loss
  $ (12,696 )   $ (18,846 )
Basic and diluted earnings per share
  $ (0.28 )   $ (0.42 )

 
- 60 -

 
3. BALANCE SHEET COMPONENTS

Balance sheet components consisted of the following:
 
   
As of June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
   
(Amounts in thousands)
 
Inventories:
           
Raw materials
  $ 283     $ 335  
Distributor inventory
    1,090       346  
Finished goods
    17,688       9,619  
Total inventories
  $ 19,062     $ 10,300  
                 
                 
Property and equipment:
               
Computer equipment and tooling
  $ 10,868     $ 9,559  
Software
    2,311       1,354  
Furniture and fixtures
    1,925       1,196  
Leasehold improvements & others
    2,568       583  
Total property and equipment
    17,672       12,692  
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization
    (9,436 )     (6,673 )
Property and equipment – net
  $ 8,236     $ 6,019  
                 
Deferred revenue:
               
Product
  $ 3,195     $ 966  
Support and services
    34,488       27,753  
Total deferred revenue
  $ 37,683     $ 28,719  
 
Intangible assets:
 
The following is a summary of the Company’s intangible assets (in thousands):
 
   
June 30, 2011
   
June 30, 2010
 
   
Gross
Carrying
  ‎ Amount
   
Accumulated‎
Amortization
   
Net   Carrying‎
Amount
   
Gross
Carrying
Amount
   
Accumulated‎
Amortization
   
Net  
Carrying
‎ Amount
 
Patents
  $ 2,935     $ (1,022 )   $ 1,913     $ 2,310     $ (532 )   $ 1,778  
Technology
    6,127       (861 )     5,266       -       -       -  
Customer relationships
    300       (30 )     270       -       -       -  
Intangible assets in process
    1,121       -       1,121       3,247       -       3,247  
Intangible assets
  $ 10,483     $ (1,913 )   $ 8,570     $ 5,557     $ (532 )   $ 5,025  
 
The Company acquired $2.8 million of identifiable technology, $0.3 million of customer relationships and $1.1 million of other intangible assets in-process from Agito as a part of the business combination discussed in Note 2. The intangible assets are being amortized over useful lives ranging from 3 years to 4 years.
 
Amortization of intangible assets for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009 was $1.4 million, $0.4 million and $0.1 million, respectively.
 
 
The estimated future amortization expenses for intangible assets for the next five years and thereafter are as follows (in thousands):

Years Ending June 30,
     
2012
  $ 2,430  
2013
    2,430  
2014
    2,014  
2015
    458  
2016
    62  
Thereafter
    55  
Total
  $ 7,449  
 
  4. SHORT-TERM INVESTMENTS
 
The following is a summary of the Company’s short-term investments (in thousands):
 
   
June 30, 2011
 
   
Amortized Cost
  Gross Unrealized
Gains
  Gross Unrealized
Losses
 
Fair Value
 
       
Corporate notes
  $ 6,105     $ 24     $ -     $ 6,129  
U.S. Government agency securities
    9,912       16       -       9,928  
Total short-term investments
  $ 16,017     $ 40     $ -     $ 16,057  
 
   
June 30, 2010
 
         
Gross Unrealized
   
Gross Unrealized
       
   
Amortized Cost
   
Gains
   
Losses
   
Fair Value
 
                         
Corporate notes and commercial paper
  $ 33,280     $ 142     $ (50 )   $ 33,372  
U.S. Government agency securities
    13,904       99             14,003  
Total short-term investments
  $ 47,184     $ 241     $ (50 )   $ 47,375  
 
The following table summarizes the maturities of the Company’s short-term investments by contractual maturity at June 30, 2011 (in thousands):
 
   
Amortized Cost
   
Fair Value
 
Less than 1 year
  $ 16,017     $ 16,057  
Due in 1 to 3 years
    -       -  
    $ 16,017     $ 16,057  
 
The following table summarizes the maturities of the Company’s short-term investments at June 30, 2010 (in thousands):
 
   
Amortized Cost
   
Fair Value
 
Less than 1 year
  $ 33,956     $ 34,133  
Due in 1 to 3 years
    13,228       13,242  
    $ 47,184     $ 47,375  
 
Actual maturities may differ from the contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay certain obligations.

 
- 62 -

 
5. FAIR VALUE DISCLOSURE
 
Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in the principal market (or most advantageous market, in the absence of a principal market) for the asset or liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Further, entities are required to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs in measuring fair value, and to utilize a three-level fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs used to measure fair value. The three levels of inputs used to measure fair value are as follows:

 
·  
Level 1 — Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
 
·  
Level 2 — Observable inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1, including quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active; and inputs other than quoted prices that are observable or are derived principally from, or corroborated by, observable market data by correlation or other means.
 
·   
Level 3 — Unobservable inputs that are supported by little or no market activity, are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities, and reflect our own assumptions about the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on the best information available in the circumstances.
 
The tables below set forth the Company’s cash equivalents and short-term investments measured at fair value on a recurring basis (in thousands):

   
June 30, 2011
 
   
Fair Value
   
Level 1
   
Level 2
   
Level 3
 
Assets:
                       
Cash and cash equivalents:
                       
Money market funds
  $ 72,445     $ 72,445     $ -     $ -  
Short-term investments:
                               
Corporate notes and commercial paper
    6,129       -       6,129       -  
U.S. Government agency securities
    9,928       -       9,928       -  
Total financial instruments measured and recorded at fair value
  $ 88,502     $ 72,445     $ 16,057     $ -  
 
The above table excludes $17.2 million of cash balances on deposit at banks.
 
   
June 30, 2010
 
   
Fair Value
   
Level 1
   
Level 2
   
Level 3
 
Assets:
                               
Cash and cash equivalents:
                               
Money market funds
  $ 51,660     $ 51,660     $ -     $ -  
Short-term investments:
                               
Corporate notes and commercial paper
    33,372       -       33,372       -  
U.S. Government agency securities
    14,003       -       14,003       -  
Total financial instruments measured and recorded at fair value
  $ 99,035     $ 51,660     $ 47,375     $ -  
 
The above table excludes $16.8 million of cash balances on deposit at banks.

Money market funds are classified within Level 1 of the fair value hierarchy because they are valued using quoted market price in active markets. Short-term investments are classified within Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy because they are valued based on other observable inputs, including broker or dealer quotations, or alternative pricing sources. When quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities are not available, the Company relies on non-binding quotes from independent pricing services. Non-binding quotes are based on proprietary valuation models prepared by independent pricing services. These models use algorithms based on inputs such as observable market data, quoted market prices for similar instruments, historical pricing trends of a security as relative to its peers, internal assumptions of the independent pricing service and statistically supported models. The Company corroborates the reasonableness of non-binding quotes received from the independent pricing service by comparing them to the a) actual experience gained from the purchases and redemption of investment securities, b) quotes received on similar securities obtained when purchasing securities and c) monitoring changes in ratings of similar securities and the related impact on the fair value. The types of instruments valued based on other observable inputs include corporate notes and commercial paper and U.S. Government agency securities. We reviewed our financial and non-financial assets and liabilities for the years ended June 30, 2011 and 2010 and concluded that there were no material impairment charges during each of these years.
 
 
6. NET LOSS PER COMMON SHARE
 
Basic net loss per share is determined by dividing net loss by the weighted average number of common shares during the period. Diluted net loss per common share is determined by dividing net loss by the weighted average number of common shares used in the basic net loss per common share calculation, plus the number of common shares that would be issued assuming conversion of all potentially dilutive securities outstanding under the treasury stock method.
 
The following table is a reconciliation of the numerators and denominators used in computing basic and diluted net loss per common share:
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
       
Numerator:
                 
Net loss
  $ (11,463 )   $ (12,804 )   $ (12,659 )
Denominator:
                       
Weighted average common shares outstanding
    46,177       44,811       43,756  
Weighted average common shares subject to repurchase
    -       (7 )     (42 )
Weighted average common shares outstanding (basic and diluted)
    46,177       44,804       43,714  
Net loss per share
                       
Basic and diluted
  $ (0.25 )   $ (0.29 )   $ (0.29 )
 
Anti-dilutive common equivalent shares related to stock-based awards excluded from the calculation of diluted shares were approximately 9.1 million, 8.3 million, and 7.7 million for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009 respectively.
 
7. INCOME TAXES
 
The components of loss before income taxes consist of the following (in thousands):
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Domestic
  $ (11,981 )   $ (13,196 )   $ (12,462 )
Foreign
    451       236       146  
Total
  $ (11,530 )   $ (12,960 )   $ (12,316 )
 
 
- 64 -

 
The income tax provision (benefit) consists of the following (in thousands):
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Current:
                 
Federal
  $ (415 )   $ (392 )   $ 100  
State
    149       125       165  
Foreign
    207       137       78  
    $ (59 )   $ (130 )   $ 343  
                         
Deferred:
                       
Federal
  $ -     $ -     $ -  
State
    -       -       -  
Foreign
    (8 )     (26 )     -  
    $ (8 )   $ (26 )   $ -  
Income tax provision (benefit)
  $ (67 )   $ (156 )   $ 343  
 
The difference between the income tax provision (benefit) and the amount computed by applying the federal statutory income tax rate to loss before income tax benefit (provision) is as follows (in thousands):
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Income tax provision at federal statutory rate
  $ (3,921 )   $ (4,415 )   $ (4,187 )
Stock-based compensation
    105       471       71  
Credits
    (1,622 )     (3,032 )     (2,162 )
State taxes
    149       112       118  
NOL carryback
    (299 )     (5,348 )     -  
Other
    288       648       (15 )
Increase (decrease) in valuation allowance
    5,233       11,408       6,518  
Total
  $ (67 )   $ (156 )   $ 343  
 
Significant components of deferred tax assets consist of the following (in thousands):
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
Net operating loss carryforwards
  $ 21,191     $ 4,777  
Tax credit carryforwards
    9,122       5,653  
Other
    13,983       12,986  
Total deferred tax assets
    44,296       23,416  
Less valuation allowance
    (44,235 )     (23,363 )
Net deferred tax assets
  $ 61     $ 53  
 
During the year ended June 30, 2011, the increase in total deferred tax assets of $20.9 million and related increase in the valuation allowance of $20.9 million was primarily related to the increase in gross net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards resulting from the favorable tax ruling from the Internal Revenue Service in March 2010.  In assessing the realization of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of deferred tax assets is based on several factors, including the Company’s past earnings and the scheduling of deferred tax liabilities and projected income from operating activities. As of June 30, 2011, management does not believe it is more likely than not that the net deferred tax assets relating to U.S. federal and state operations are realizable. The Company intends to maintain the valuation allowance until sufficient positive evidence exists to support reversal of some or all of the allowance. The Company’s future income tax expense (benefit) will be affected in the event changes to the valuation allowance are required.
 
As of June 30, 2011, the Company had federal and California tax credit carryforwards of $5.6 million and $5.4 million, respectively. The federal tax credit carryfowards expire at various dates between 2024 and 2032. The California tax credits may be carried forward indefinitely. The Company also had California and other state net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $18.2 million and $14.3 million, respectively, which expire at various dates between 2016 and 2032.
 
 
- 65 -

 
The undistributed earnings from the Company’s foreign subsidiaries are not subject to a U.S. tax provision because it is management’s intention to permanently reinvest such undistributed earnings outside of the United States. The Company evaluates its circumstances and reassesses this determination on a periodic basis. As of June 30, 2011, the determination of the unrecorded deferred tax liability related to these earnings was not practicable. If circumstances change and it becomes apparent that some or all of the undistributed earnings of the Company's foreign subsidiaries will be remitted in the foreseeable future, the Company will be required to recognize a deferred tax liability on those amounts.
 
In March 2010, the Company received a favorable tax ruling from the Internal Revenue Service related to the methodology that the Company used to analyze its various equity transactions to determine whether a change in ownership had occurred as defined by Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code.  As a result of the ruling on the methodology, the Company  performed Section 382 studies in 2011 and 2010 that resulted in approximately $51.4 million of net operating losses ($25.8 million in fiscal year 2011 and $25.6 million in fiscal year 2010) that were previously limited under Section 382 became available to the Company to offset future taxable income and to recapture previously paid taxes. The Company established a full valuation allowance against these net operating losses.
 
 During fiscal 2011, the Company received a refund of approximately $1.7 million based on an amended fiscal 2008 federal income tax return filed in fiscal 2010.  The refund was due to a carryback of available net operating losses.  During fiscal 2011, the Company filed amended fiscal 2006, 2007 and 2008 returns to claim tax refunds for the carryback of AMT losses incurred in fiscal 2010.  The refund was received during fiscal 2011, totaling approximately $0.6 million, of which approximately $0.3 million was recorded as a tax benefit in the fiscal 2011 tax provision.
 
After accounting for the additional net operating losses made available under Section 382 as a result of the favorable tax ruling and the carryback of net operating losses used to generate tax refund claims, the Company had federal net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $59.5 million as of June 30, 2011.  The federal net operating loss carryforwards expire at various dates between 2023 and 2032.
 
The "Worker, Homeownership and Business Assistance Act of 2009" was enacted in November 2009. Under this Act, businesses with net operating losses for 2008 and 2009 (the Company’s fiscal years 2009 and 2010 respectively) may carry back those losses for up to five years.  As noted above, the Company filed refund claims for the carryback of AMT losses incurred in fiscal 2010.
 
The “Tax Relief, Unemployment Insurance Reauthorization, and Job Creation Act of 2010” (the “2010 Tax Act”) was enacted in December 2010, which extended the R&D credit for qualifying activities through December 31, 2011 and extended the bonus depreciation provisions for qualifying property acquired after September 8, 2011 and before January 1, 2012.  In addition, the 2010 Tax Act increased the qualifying percentage deduction for bonus depreciation from 50% to 100% for acquired property made during this time.
 
The Company maintains liabilities for uncertain tax positions. These liabilities involve considerable judgment and estimation and are continuously monitored by management based on the best information available, including changes in tax regulations, the outcome of relevant court cases, and other information. As of June 30, 2011 and June 30, 2010, the Company's total amount of unrecognized tax benefit was approximately $3.1 million and $2.1 million, respectively. These amounts are primarily related to the Company's research and development tax credits and tax accruals.
 
 A reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the total amounts of unrecognized tax benefits for fiscal 2011 and 2010 is as follows (in thousands):
 
   
June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Beginning balance
  $ 2,091     $ 1,540     $ 1,525  
Decrease in tax positions for prior years
    (183 )     -       (435 )
Increase in tax positions for current year
    1,166       551       450  
Ending balance
  $ 3,074     $ 2,091     $ 1,540  
 
As of June 30, 2011, the Company's total amount of unrecognized tax benefit was approximately $3.1 million of which only $0.1 million, if recognized, would impact the effective tax rate. The Company does not expect its unrecognized tax benefits to change materially over the next 12 months.
 
 
- 66 -

 
The Company’s policy is to include interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits within the provision for taxes on the consolidated statements of operations. Management determined that no accrual for interest and penalties was required as of June 30, 2011.
 
While management believes that the Company has adequately provided for all tax positions, amounts asserted by tax authorities could be greater or less than the recorded position. Accordingly, the Company’s provisions on federal, state and foreign tax-related matters to be recorded in the future may change as revised estimates are made or the underlying matters are settled or otherwise resolved.
 
The Company’s primary tax jurisdiction is in the United States. For federal and state tax purposes, the tax years 2000 through 2011 remain open and subject to tax examination by the appropriate federal or state taxing authorities.
 
8. COMMON STOCK
 
Common Shares Reserved for Issuance
 
At June 30, 2011, the Company had reserved shares of common stock for issuance as follows (in thousands):
 
Reserved under stock option plans
    13,602  
Reserved under employee stock purchase plan
    534  
Total
    14,136  
 
9. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS
 
Equity Stock Incentive Plans

The Company grants nonqualified (“NSO”) and incentive stock options (“ISOs”), restricted stock awards, and restricted stock units to officers, directors, employees and consultants under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (“2007 Plan”), which is the successor to the 1997 Plan. The 2007 Plan, provides for the granting of ISOs and NSOs for over a period not to exceed ten years and at exercise prices that are not less than 100% and 85%, respectively, of the estimated fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant as determined by the Board of Directors. Stock options issued under the 2007 Plan generally vest ratably over four years from the date of grant, and restricted stock units issued under the 2007 Plan generally vest 25% at one year or 50% at two years from the date of grant and 1/48 th monthly thereafter.

The 2007 Plan provides for automatic annual increases of shares available for issuance of up to 5% of the number of common shares then outstanding.  In fiscal 2011 and 2010, the Board of Directors increased the number of shares authorized and available for issuance under the 2007 Plan by 2.2 million and 2.2 million shares, respectively, pursuant to the automatic increase provision. As of June 30, 2011, the Company had 5.0 million shares of common stock available for issuance under the 2007 Plan.

Tender Offer

On January 2, 2009, the Company filed with the SEC a Schedule TO with respect to a proposed stock option exchange program under which all U.S. employees of the Company holding stock options with exercise prices greater than $9.50 per share could tender their options in exchange for an equivalent number of new stock options to be granted under the 2007 Plan (“Tender Offer”). In connection with the Tender Offer, the Company accepted for exchange, options to purchase 3,215,000 shares of its common stock from 212 employees, representing 99% of the eligible shares. In exchange for the options surrendered, the Company issued new (replacement) options to purchase 3,215,000 shares of its common stock at an exercise price of $4.82. The new stock options vest over four years, with either (i) 25% of the shares vesting on the first anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the remaining three years or (ii) 50% of the shares vesting on the second anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the remaining years. The vesting schedule for the employee was determined based on the vesting schedule of the surrendered options.   The fair value of the new options was measured as the total of the unrecognized compensation cost of the original options tendered, plus the incremental compensation cost of the replacement (new) options, which was measured as the excess of fair value of the replacement (new) options over the fair value of the original options immediately before cancellation based on the share price and other pertinent factors at that date.
 
 
- 67 -

 
The Company incurred an incremental stock-based compensation cost of $3.0 million, net of estimated forfeitures, which together with $14.8 million of unamortized expense on the original options, are being recognized on a straight basis over the vesting period of the new options.
 
The following table summarizes the Company’s stock option activities for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2011 (in thousands, except per share amounts):
 
   
Shares
Subject to
Options
Outstanding
   
Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price
   
Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Term
(in years)
   
Weighted-
Average
Intrinsic
 Value
 
   
 
 
Balance at July 1, 2010
    7,492     $ 4.59              
Options granted
    2,526     $ 7.00              
Options exercised
    (1,308 )   $ 3.58              
Options cancelled/forfeited
    (779 )   $ 5.37              
Balance at June 30, 2011
    7,931     $ 5.45       6.83     $ 38,172  
Options exercisable at June 30, 2011
    3,486     $ 4.44       5.47     $ 20,348  
Vested and expected to vest at June 30, 2011
    7,278     $ 5.35       6.68     $ 35,760  
 
The weighted-average grant-date fair value of options granted during the years ended June 30 2011, 2010, and 2009 was $3.55, $3.55, and $5.72, respectively. The total intrinsic value for options exercised in the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009 was $6.4 million, $2.1 million and $1.5 million, respectively, and represents the difference between the fair value of the Company’s common stock at the dates of exercise and the exercise price of the options.
 
 The following table summarizes information about outstanding and exercisable options at June 30, 2011:
 
 
Exercise Prices
   
Options
Outstanding
   
Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Life
   
Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
 
       
(Amounts in thousands, except per share data
 and contractual life)
 
  $ 0.10 – 0.40       232       3.27     $ 0.33  
  $ 0.80 – 1.00       351       4.54       0.85  
  $ 2.50 – 3.20       403       5.26       3.13  
  $ 3.50 – 4.80       1,086       8.67       4.39  
  $ 4.82       2,204       4.63       4.82  
  $ 4.93 – 5.08       681       6.77       4.97  
  $ 5.10 - 6.08       709       7.38       5.60  
  $ 6.09 - 8.29       1,454       9.05       7.18  
  $ 8.41 - 11.40       789       8.85       10.27  
  $ 12.55 – 15.41       22       6.21       13.48  
 
Total Outstanding
      7,931       6.83     $ 5.45  
 
Stock-based Compensation

The Company estimates the fair value of stock options using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, which requires the use of the following assumptions: (i) the expected volatility of the Company’s common stock, which is based on volatility data of certain peer companies; (ii) the expected term which is the period that the Company’s stock-based awards are expected to be outstanding, and the Company has elected to use the “simplified method” as prescribed by authoritative guidance to compute expected term; (iii) an expected dividend yield, which is assumed to be 0% as the Company has not paid and, as of the date of grant, did not anticipate paying dividends in the foreseeable future; and (iv) a risk-free interest rate, which is based on the U.S. Treasury yield curve in effect on the date of grant for zero coupon U.S. Treasury notes with maturities approximately equal to expected term of the option award. The fair value of each option is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option valuation method, with the following assumptions for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009:
 
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Expected life from grant date of option
 
5.75-6.26 years
   
6.08-6.50 years
   
4.58-6.46 years
 
Risk-free interest rate
    1.43-2.12 %     2.26-2.47 %     1.76-3.11 %
Expected volatility
    57 %     57-58 %     58-59 %
Expected dividend yield
    0 %     0 %     0 %
 
As of June 30, 2011 total unrecognized compensation cost related to stock options granted to employees and non-employee directors was $16.8 million, net of estimated forfeitures, which the Company expects to recognize over 3.0 years.
 
Employee Stock Purchase Plan

On September 18, 2007, the Board of Directors approved the commencement of offering periods under a previously-approved employee stock purchase plan (the “ESPP”). The ESPP allows eligible employees to purchase shares of the Company's common stock at a discount through payroll deductions. The ESPP consists of six-month offering periods commencing on May 1 st   and November 1 st   each year. Under the ESPP, employees purchase shares of the Company's common stock at 90% of the market value at either the beginning of the offering period or the end of the offering period, whichever price is lower. The ESPP was amended in November 2010 to permit employees to purchase shares of the Company s common stock at 85% of market value at either the beginning of the offering period or the end of the offering period, whichever price is lower, effective for the offering period commencing on and after May 1, 2011.
 
In February of fiscal year 2011 and 2010, pursuant to the automatic increase provisions of the ESPP, the Company’s Board of Directors approved increases to the number of shares authorized and reserved for issuance under the ESPP by 469,980 shares and 449,000 shares, respectively.
 
The fair value of stock purchase rights granted under the ESPP is estimated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model, based on the following assumptions for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010 and 2009:
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
Expected life from grant date of ESPP
 
0.50 years
   
0.50 years
   
0.50 years
 
Risk-free interest rate
    0.10-0.20 %     0.16-0.26 %     0.31-1.81 %
Expected volatility
    46-52 %     46-138 %     92-138 %
Expected dividend yield
    0 %     0 %     0 %
 
Expenses related to shares issued under the ESPP are included in stock-based compensation expense. The Company issued 577,193 shares and 484,721 shares under the ESPP in fiscal 2011 and 2010, respectively, at a weighted average price per share of $5.60 and $5.05, respectively.
 
 
Restricted Stock Awards and Restricted Stock Units
 
Restricted stock award and restricted stock unit activity for the year ended June 30, 2011 is as follows (in thousands):
 
   
Shares
   
Weighted-
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 
Outstanding - July 1, 2010
    809     $ 5.80  
Awarded
    913     $ 5.61  
Released
    (289 )   $ 5.95  
Forfeited
    (237 )   $ 5.80  
Outstanding - June 30, 2011
    1,196     $ 5.62  
 
The weighted average grant-date fair value of restricted stock awards granted during fiscal 2011, 2010 and 2009 was $5.1 million, $2.8 million, and $3.0 million, respectively. As of June 30, 2011, total unrecognized compensation cost related to restricted stock units awarded to employees and directors was $4.0 million, net of estimated forfeitures, which the Company expects to recognize over 3.0 years.
 
 As permitted under the 2007 Plan, in fiscal 2011, the Company issued 51,435 shares of restricted stock, with a fair value of $0.4 million, to non-employee directors electing to receive them in lieu of an annual cash retainer. These shares were issued quarterly and vest immediate upon issuance.
 
10. LITIGATION, COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
 
Litigation – At June 30, 2011, the Company is not a party to any material litigation.
 
General - The Company is involved in litigation from time to time relating to claims arising out of the ordinary course of business or otherwise. Any litigation, regardless of outcome, is costly and time-consuming, can divert the attention of management and key personnel from business operations and deter channel partners and distributors from selling the Company’s products and dissuade potential customers from purchasing the Company’s products.
 
Leases - The Company leases its facilities under non-cancelable operating leases which expire at various times through 2015. The leases provide for the lessee to pay all costs of utilities, insurance, and taxes. Future minimum lease payments under the non-cancelable leases as of June 30, 2011, are as follows (in thousands):
 
Years Ending June 30,
     
2012
  $ 1,632  
2013
    2,037  
2014
    1,930  
2015
    1,122  
2016
    866  
Therafter
    1,571  
Total
  $ 9,158  
 
Lease obligations for the Company’s foreign offices are denominated in foreign currencies, which were converted to U.S. dollars at the interbank exchange rate on June 30, 2011.
 
Rent expense for the years ended June 30, 2011, 2010, and 2009, was $1.9 million, $1.4 million, and $1.9 million, respectively.
 
Purchase commitments - As of June 30, 2011, the Company had purchase commitments with contract manufacturers for inventory and with technology firms for usage of software licenses totaling approximately $19.9 million.
 
Indemnification - Under the indemnification provisions of the Company’s customer agreements, the Company agrees to indemnify and defend its customers against infringement of any patent, trademark, or copyright of any country or the misappropriation of any trade secret, arising from the customers’ legal use of the Company’s services. The exposure to the Company under these indemnification provisions is generally limited to the total amount paid by the customers under pertinent agreements. However, certain indemnification provisions potentially expose the Company to losses in excess of the aggregate amount received from the customer. To date, there have been no claims against the Company or its customers pertaining to such indemnification provisions and no amounts have been recorded.
 
 
The Company also has entered into customary indemnification agreements with each of its officers and directors. The Company also has indemnification obligations to the underwriters of its initial public offering pursuant to the underwriting agreement executed in connection with that offering.
 
11. SEGMENT INFORMATION
 
The Company is organized as, and operates in, one reportable segment: the development and sale of IP voice communication systems. The Company’s chief operating decision-maker is its Chief Executive Officer. The Company’s Chief Executive Officer reviews financial information presented on a consolidated basis for purposes of evaluating financial performance and allocating resources, accompanied by information about revenue by geographic regions. The Company’s assets are primarily located in the United States of America and not allocated to any specific region and it does not measure the performance of its geographic regions based upon asset-based metrics. Therefore, geographic information is presented only for revenue. Revenue by geographic region is based on the ship to address on the customer order.
 
The following presents total revenue by geographic region (in thousands):
 
   
Year Ended June 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
United States of America
  $ 177,049     $ 133,248     $ 125,321  
International
    23,063       15,216       9,501  
Total
  $ 200,112     $ 148,464     $ 134,822  
 
12. EMPLOYEE 401(K) PLAN
 
Employee 401(k) Plan - The Company adopted a defined contribution retirement plan which has been determined by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS”) to be qualified as a 401(k) plan (the “Plan”). The Plan covers substantially all employees. The Plan provides for voluntary tax deferred contributions of 1 -20% of gross compensation, subject to certain IRS limitations. Based on approval by the Board of Directors, the Company may make matching contributions to the Plan. The Company has not made any matching contributions to the Plan since inception of the Plan.
 
13. QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (Unaudited)
 
The following table summarizes the Company’s information on total revenue, gross profit, net loss and earnings per share by quarter for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2011 and 2010. This data was derived from the Company’s unaudited consolidated financial statements.
 
   
Three Months Ended
 
   
Jun. 30, 2011
   
Mar. 31, 2011
   
Dec. 31, 2010
   
Sept. 30, 2010
   
Jun. 30, 2010
   
Mar. 31, 2010
   
Dec. 31, 2009
   
Sept. 30, 2009
 
                                                 
   
(In thousands, except per share amounts)
 
                                                 
Total revenue
  $ 56,527     $ 51,577     $ 47,729     $ 44,279     $ 42,223     $ 37,034     $ 35,457     $ 33,750  
                                                                 
Gross profit
    37,091       35,083       31,757       29,536       27,864       24,052       22,864       21,633  
                                                                 
Net loss
    (1,745 )     (2,382 )     (3,691 )     (3,645 )     (3,693 )     (4,489 )     (2,496 )     (2,126 )
                                                                 
Basic and diluted net loss per common share
  $ (0.04 )   $ (0.05 )   $ (0.08 )   $ (0.08 )   $ (0.08 )   $ (0.10 )   $ (0.06 )   $ (0.05 )
 
ITEM 9.
CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSUR E
 
None.
 
 
- 71 -

 
ITEM 9A.
CONTROLS AND PROCEDUR ES
 
Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures
 
Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and our Chief Financial Officer (CFO), we conducted an evaluation of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Exchange Act), as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K. Based upon that evaluation, our CEO and our CFO have concluded that the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed by us in reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act (i) is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in Securities and Exchange Commission rules and forms and (ii) is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our CEO and CFO, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.
 
Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting
 
As required by Rule 13a-15(d) of the Exchange Act, our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, conducted an evaluation of our “internal control over financial reporting” as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(f) to determine whether any changes in our internal control over financial reporting occurred during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2011 that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting. Based on that evaluation, there have been no such changes during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2011.
 
Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
 
Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934). Our internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.
 
Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our principal executive officer and principal financial officer, we conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting based on the framework set forth in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on our evaluation under the framework set forth in Internal Control — Integrated Framework, our management concluded that our internal control over financial reporting was effective as of June 30, 2011.
 
The effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2011 has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in its report which appears below.
 
Inherent Limitations on Effectiveness of Controls
 
Our management, including our CEO and CFO, does not expect that our disclosure controls and procedures or our internal controls will prevent all errors and all fraud. A control system, no matter how well conceived and operated, can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that the objectives of the control system are met. Further, the design of a control system must reflect the fact that there are resource constraints, and the benefits of controls must be considered relative to their costs. Our disclosure controls and procedures and our internal controls over financial reporting have been designed to provide reasonable assurance of achieving their objectives. Because of the inherent limitations in all control systems, no evaluation of controls can provide absolute assurance that all control issues and instances of fraud, if any, have been detected.
 
 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
ShoreTel, Inc.
Sunnyvale, California
 
We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of June 30, 2011, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.
 
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on that assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
 
Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
 
In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2011, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.
 
We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended June 30, 2011 of the Company and our report dated September 12, 2011, expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements and included an explanatory paragraph relating to the change in the Company’s method for recognizing revenue from the adoption of new accounting standards.
 

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Jose, California
September 12, 2011
ITEM 9B.
OTHER INFORMAT ION
 
None.
 
P ART III
 
ITEM 10.
DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNA NCE
 
The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
 
ITEM 11.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
 
The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
 
ITEM 12.
SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTE RS
 
The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
 
ITEM 13.
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS, RELATED TRANSACTIONS AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDEN CE
 
The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
 
ITEM 14.
PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVI CES
 
The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2011 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
 
PART IV
 
ITEM 15.
EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.
 
(a) (1) Financial Statements - See Index to Financial Statements at page 48 of this Report.
 
(2) Financial Statement Schedule - Financial statement schedules have been omitted because the required information is not present or not present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule, or because the information required is included in the financial statements or the notes to those financial statements.
 
(3) Exhibits - See Exhibit Index at page 76  of this Report.
 

SIGNA TURES
 
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this Annual Report on Form 10-Kto be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, on this 12th day of September 2011.
 
 
ShoreTel, Inc.
   
 
By:
/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY
   
Michael E. Healy
   
Chief Financial Officer
     
 
POWER OF ATTORNEY
 
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that each individual whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints Ava M. Hahn and Michael E. Healy, his or her true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent with full power of substitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K, with all exhibits thereto and all documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorney-in-fact and agent, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in and about the premises, as fully to all intents and purposes as he or she might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorney-in-fact and agent, or his or her substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this Annual Report on Form 10-K has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
 
Name
 
Title
 
Date
 
           
/s/ PETER BLACKMORE
 
President and
 
September 12, 2011
 
Peter Blackmore
 
Chief Executive Officer and Director
     
   
(Principal Executive Officer)
     
           
/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY
 
Chief Financial Officer
 
September 12, 2011
 
Michael E. Healy
 
(Principal Financial Officer and
     
   
Principal Accounting Officer)
     
/s/ GARY J. DAICHENDT
 
Chairman of the Board
 
September 12, 2011
 
Gary J. Daichendt
         
           
/s/ EDWIN J. BASART
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Edwin J. Basart
         
           
/s/ MARK F. BREGMAN
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Mark F. Bregman
         
           
/s/ KENNETH DENMAN
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Kenneth Denman
         
           
/s/ MICHAEL GREGOIRE
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Michael Gregoire
         
           
/s/ CHARLES D. KISSNER
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Charles D. Kissner
         
           
/s/ EDWARD F. THOMPSON
 
Director
 
September 12, 2011
 
Edward F. Thompson
         


EXHIBIT INDEX
 
 
Exhibit
Number
 
Exhibit Title
3.1(1)
 
Third Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant .
     
3.2(9)
 
Third Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant.
     
4.1(1)
 
Form of Registrant’s Common Stock certificate.
     
4.2(1)
 
Seventh Amended and Restated Rights Agreement dated October 20, 2004 by and among the Registrant and certain of its equity holders.
     
10.1(1)
 
Form of Indemnity Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors and executive officers.
     
10.2(1) +
 
1997 Stock Option Plan and forms of stock option agreement and stock option exercise agreement.
     
10.3(1) +
 
2007 Equity Incentive Plan and forms of stock option agreement and stock option exercise agreement.
     
10.4(2)+
 
2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, as amended on November 2, 2010.
     
10.5(4)+
 
ShoreTel FY 2009 Executive Bonus Plan.
     
10.6(8)+
 
Executive Employment Agreement dated December 9, 2010, by the Registrant and Peter Blackmore.
 
10.7(1)   Lease Agreement between River Place Corporate Park, LP and Shore Tel, Inc, dated June 30, 2008, and as amended on September 16, 2009, December 2009, and December 10, 2010 .
     
10.8(1)+   Offer Letter, dated April 22, 2007, by the Registrant and Michael E. Healy.
     
10.9(3)+   Employment Agreement, dated as of January 23, 2008, between the Registrant and Donald Girskis.
     
10.10(1)   Manufacturing Services Agreement, dated October 28, 2005, between Registrant and Jabil Circuit, Inc.
     
10.11(7)   Office Lease Oakmead West, dated April 20, 2007, between Registrant and Carr NP Properties, L.L.C., and Amendment No. 1 thereto.
     
10.12(5)+
 
Non-employee director compensation guidelines.
     
10.13(8)+
 
Form of "Tier 2" Retention Incentive Agreement .
     
10.14(8)+   Form of Form of "Tier 3" Retention Incentive Agreement .
     
10.15   Board Observer Rights Agreement dated August 17, 2011 between Registrant and Edwin J. Basart .
     
10.16   Lease Agreement, dated July 21, 2011 between Registrant and BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
     
 
Subsidiaries.
     
 
Consent of independent registered public accounting firm.
     
24.1(7)
 
Power of Attorney (included on the signature page).
     
 
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
     
 
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
      
 
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
 
 
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
     
(1)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended December 31, 2010 filed on February 4, 2010.
     
(2)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended December 31, 2010 filed on February 4, 2010.
     
(3)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2008 filed on May 13, 2008.
     
(4)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended June 30, 2008 filed on September 12, 2008.
     
(5)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Form 8-K filed on February 12, 2008.
     
(6)
 
Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Form 8-K filed on February 9, 2009.
     
(7)
 
Intentionally omitted.
     
(8)   Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2011, filed on May 9, 2011
     
(9)   Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2009, filed on November 9, 2009.
     
+
 
Management Compensatory Plan or Arrangement
     
   
(b) Financial Statement Schedules.
     
    All schedules have been omitted because they are either inapplicable or the required information has been given in the consolidated financial statements or the notes thereto.
 
 
- 77 -


LOGO 2
 
EXHIBIT 10.15

August 16, 2011

Edwin J. Basart
960 Stewart Dr.
Sunnyvale, CA 94085

 
Re:
ShoreTel, Inc. Board Observer Rights Agreement

Dear Ed:

Upon the expiration of your term as a member of the Board of Directors of ShoreTel, Inc. on November 9, 2011, you shall be appointed a Special Advisor to the Board and shall be granted Board observer rights as set forth herein.

Part I : Board Observer

So long as you are an officer of the Company, you shall be eligible to serve as Special Advisor to the Board and the Company will (i) permit you (the “ Observer ”) to attend the regularly scheduled quarterly meetings ( “Board Meetings” ) of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board” ) in a non-voting, observer capacity and (ii) shall provide to the Observer, concurrently with the members of the applicable Board, and in the same manner, notice of each such meeting and a copy of all materials provided to such members in connection with Board meetings (the “ Board Materials ”). You acknowledge that the Company may from time to time hold special meetings of the Board in between its regularly scheduled quarterly meetings and that the provisions of Part I of this letter agreement shall not apply to such special meetings, except that the Company will provide you with minutes of any such special meetings of the Board.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may be excluded from any portion of any Board Meeting and shall not be entitled to receive any Board Materials to the extent (i) necessary to preserve the attorney-client privilege of either of the Company, or (ii) the Board determines in good faith that the matters to be discussed (or otherwise disclosed in the Board Materials, as applicable) are (a) of such a highly confidential and sensitive nature that it would not be in the best interests of the Company for such matters to be disclosed to you, or (b) that you (or your affiliates) have interests with respect to a matter that are potentially in conflict with the interests of the Company.

960 Stewart Dr., Sunnyvale, CA 94085 USA  +1 (800) 425-9385

 
 

 

LOGO 2
 
Part II: Confidentiality and Non-Disclosure

You agree that any confidential information, knowledge or data concerning or relating to the business or financial affairs of the Company to which you have been or shall become privy by reason of this letter or the rights it creates, shall be “confidential information” for purposes of the Employment, Confidential Information, Invention Assignment and Arbitration Agreement between you and the Company.

Part III: Non-Assignability and Termination

Your rights and Special Advisor appointment described herein are not assignable and shall terminate and be of no further force or effect upon the earlier of (i) November 9, 2014, unless extended by the Board of Directors, (ii) an acquisition of the Company, or (iii) as otherwise provided herein. The confidentiality provisions hereof will survive any such termination.

 
Very truly yours,
 
     
 
SHORETEL, Inc.
 
     
 
/s/ Peter Blackmore
 
 
Peter Blackmore, CEO
 

Accepted and agreed :

Edwin J. Basart

By:____/s/ Edwin J. Basart__________________________

Date:________8/17/2011______________________

960 Stewart Dr., Sunnyvale, CA 94085 USA  +1 (800) 425-9385
 
 


[ EXHIBIT 10.16]

LEASE AGREEMENT

THIS LEASE AGREEMENT is made this 21 day of July, 2011, between BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C., a Delaware limited liability company ("Landlord"), and the Tenant named below.

Tenant:
ShoreTel, Inc., a Delaware corporation
   
Tenant’s Representative,
ShoreTel, Inc.
Address, and Telephone:
960 Stewart Drive
 
Sunnyvale, CA 94085
 
408-331-3300
 
ATTN: General Counsel
   
Premises:
That portion of the Building, containing approximately 32,872 rentable square feet, as determined by Landlord, commonly known as 38897 Cherry Street, Newark, California 94560 , as shown on Exhibit A.
   
Project:
The project commonly known as Mowry Business Center
   
Building:
Building # 3
 
38897 Cherry St.
 
Newark , California 94560
   
Tenant's Proportionate Share of Project:
6.50%
   
Tenant's Proportionate Share of Building:
33.66%
   
Lease Term:
Beginning on the Commencement Date and ending on the last day of the Sixty-fifth (65 th ) full calendar month thereafter.
   
Commencement Date:
The later to occur of (i) October 1, 2011 or (ii) the date the Initial Improvements are Substantially Completed (as defined in Addendum 6)
   
Initial Monthly Base Rent:
See Addendum I
   
Initial Estimated Monthly Operating Expense Payments:
 (estimates only and subject to adjustment to actual costs and expenses according to the provisions of this Lease)
1. Utilities:
 
2. Common Area Charges:
 
3. Taxes:
 
4. Insurance:
 
5. Management Fee:
n/a
 
$ 1,115.82
 
$2,958.18
 
$506.77
 
$620.64
 
 
 
Initial Estimated Monthly Operating Expense Payments:
$5,201.41
   
Initial Monthly Base Rent and Operating Expense Payments:
$5,201.41
   
Security Deposit:
$50,000.00

 
 

 

Broker:
Jason Ovadia & Bill Fleck – Jones Lang LaSalle Brokerage, Inc.
   
Addenda:
1. Base Rent Adjustment s 2. HVAC Maintenance Contract 3. Move Out Conditions 4. Cancellation Option 5. Two Renewal Options at Market 6. Construction (Turnkey)
   
Exhibits:
A. Site Plan B. Floor Plan B-1. Demo Plan B-2 Proposed Floor Plan C. Sign Criteria D. Customer Finish Standards E. Form of Subordination, Non-disturbance and Attornment Agreement

1.              Granting Clause . In consideration of the obligation of Tenant to pay rent as herein provided and in consideration of the other terms, covenants, and conditions hereof, Landlord leases to Tenant, and Tenant takes from Landlord, the Premises, to have and to hold for the Lease Term, subject to the terms, covenants and conditions of this Lease.

2.              Acceptance of Premises . Tenant shall accept the Premises in its condition as of the Commencement Date, subject to all applicable laws, ordinances, regulations, covenants and restrictions. Landlord has made no representation or warranty as to the suitability of the Premises for the conduct of Tenant's business, and Tenant waives any implied warranty that the Premises are suitable for Tenant's intended purposes. Except as provided in Paragraph 10, in no event shall Landlord have any obligation for any defects in the Premises or any limitation on its use. The taking of possession of the Premises shall be conclusive evidence that Tenant accepts the Premises and that the Premises were in good condition at the time possession was taken except for items that are Landlord's responsibility under Paragraph 10 and any punchlist items agreed to in writing by Landlord and Tenant.

3.              Use . The Premises shall be used only for the purpose of receiving, storing, shipping and selling (but specifically excluding retail selling) products, materials and merchandise made and/or distributed by Tenant and for such other lawful purposes as may be incidental thereto; provided, however, with Landlord's prior written consent (which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed), Tenant may also use the Premises for light manufacturing. Tenant shall not conduct or give notice of any auction, liquidation, or going out of business sale on the Premises. Tenant will use the Premises in a careful, safe and proper manner and will not commit waste, overload the floor or structure of the Premises or subject the Premises to use that would damage the Premises. Tenant shall not permit any objectionable or unpleasant odors, smoke, dust, gas, noise, or vibrations to emanate from the Premises, or take any other action that would constitute a nuisance or would disturb, unreasonably interfere with, or endanger Landlord or any tenants of the Project. Outside storage, including without limitation, storage of trucks and other vehicles, is prohibited without Landlord's prior written consent; provided, however, Tenant shall have the right to park operable vehicles and trailers overnight at the truck loading docks and designated truck and trailer parking areas for the Premises and operable automobiles in the designated automobile parking areas, and further provided there is no interference with the access of other tenants to the Building and Project parking lots and truck courts. Tenant, at its sole expense, shall use and occupy the Premises in compliance with all laws, including, without limitation, the Americans With Disabilities Act, orders, judgments, ordinances, regulations, codes, directives, permits, licenses, covenants and restrictions now or hereafter applicable to the Premises (collectively, "Legal Requirements"). Landlord hereby represents and warrants that the Premises are or shall be compliant with the Legal Requirements as of the Commencement Date. The Premises shall not be used as a place of public accommodation under the Americans With Disabilities Act or similar state statutes or local ordinances or any regulations promulgated thereunder, all as may be amended from time to time. Tenant shall, at its expense, make any alterations or modifications, within or without the Premises, that are required by Legal Requirements related to Tenant's use or occupation of the Premises. Tenant will not use or permit the Premises to be used for any purpose or in any manner that would void Tenant's or Landlord's insurance, increase the insurance risk, or cause the disallowance of any sprinkler credits. If any increase in the cost of any insurance on the Premises or the Project is caused by Tenant's use or occupation of the Premises, or because Tenant vacates the Premises, then Tenant shall pay the amount of such increase to Landlord. Any occupation of the Premises by Tenant prior to the Commencement Date shall be subject to all obligations of Tenant under this Lease.

4.              Base Rent . Tenant shall pay Base Rent in the amount set forth in Addendum 1. The first month's Base Rent, the Security Deposit, and the first monthly installment of estimated Operating Expenses (as hereafter defined) shall be due and payable on the date hereof, and Tenant promises to pay to Landlord in advance, without demand, deduction or set-off, monthly installments of Base Rent on or before the first day of each calendar month succeeding the Commencement Date. Payments of Base Rent for any fractional calendar month shall be prorated. All payments required to be made by Tenant to Landlord hereunder (or to such other party as Landlord may from time to time specify in writing) shall be made by check, or by Electronic Fund Transfer (“EFT”) of immediately available federal funds before 11:00 a.m., Eastern Time at such place, within the continental United States, as Landlord may from time to time designate to Tenant in writing. The obligation of Tenant to pay Base Rent and other sums to Landlord and the obligations of Landlord under this Lease are independent obligations. Tenant shall have no right at any time to abate, reduce, or set-off any rent due hereunder except as may be expressly provided in this Lease. If Tenant is delinquent in any monthly installment of Base Rent or of Operating Expenses beyond 5 days after the due date thereof, and after notice as provided below, Tenant shall pay to Landlord on demand a late charge equal to 8 percent of such delinquent sum. Tenant shall not be obligated to pay the late charge until Landlord has given Tenant 5 days written notice of the delinquent payment (which may be given at any time during the delinquency); provided, however, that such notice shall not be required more than twice in any 12-month period. The provision for such late charge shall be in addition to all of Landlord's other rights and remedies hereunder or at law and shall not be construed as a penalty or as limiting Landlord's remedies in any manner.

 
2

 

5.              Security Deposit . The Security Deposit shall be held by Landlord as security for the performance of Tenant's obligations under this Lease. The Security Deposit is not an advance rental deposit or a measure of Landlord's damages in case of Tenant's default. Upon each occurrence of an Event of Default (hereinafter defined), Landlord may use all or part of the Security Deposit to pay delinquent payments due under this Lease, and the cost of any damage, injury, expense or liability caused by such Event of Default, without prejudice to any other remedy provided herein or provided by law. Tenant shall pay Landlord on demand the amount that will restore the Security Deposit to its original amount. Landlord's obligation respecting the Security Deposit is that of a debtor, not a trustee; no interest shall accrue thereon. The Security Deposit shall be the property of Landlord, but shall be paid to Tenant when Tenant's obligations under this Lease have been completely fulfilled. Landlord shall be released from any obligation with respect to the Security Deposit upon transfer of this Lease and the Premises to a person or entity assuming Landlord's obligations under this Paragraph 5.

6.              Operating Expense Payments . During each month of the Lease Term, on the same date that Base Rent is due, Tenant shall pay Landlord an amount equal to 1/12 of the annual cost, as estimated by Landlord from time to time, of Tenant's Proportionate Share (hereinafter defined) of Operating Expenses for the Project. Payments thereof for any fractional calendar month shall be prorated. The term "Operating Expenses" means all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord with respect to the maintenance, and operation of the Project including, but not limited to costs of: Taxes (hereinafter defined) and fees payable to tax consultants and attorneys for consultation and contesting taxes; insurance; utilities; maintenance, repair and replacement of all portions of the Project, including without limitation, paving and parking areas, roads, non-structural components of the roofs (including the roof membrane), alleys, and driveways, mowing, landscaping, exterior painting, utility lines, heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, lighting, electrical systems and other mechanical and building systems; amounts paid to contractors and subcontractors for work or services performed in connection with any of the foregoing; charges or assessments of any association to which the Project is subject; property management fees payable to a property manager, including any affiliate of Landlord, or if there is no property manager, an administration fee of 15 percent of Operating Expenses payable to Landlord; security services, if any; trash collection, sweeping and removal; and additions or alterations made by Landlord to the Project or the Building in order to comply with Legal Requirements (other than those expressly required herein to be made by Tenant) or that are appropriate to the continued operation of the Project or the Building as a bulk warehouse facility in the market area, provided that the cost of additions or alterations that are required to be capitalized for federal income tax purposes shall be amortized on a straight line basis over a period equal to the useful life thereof for federal income tax purposes or 10 years. Operating Expenses do not include costs, expenses, depreciation or amortization for capital repairs and capital replacements required to be made by Landlord under Paragraph 10 of this Lease, debt service under mortgages or ground rent under ground leases, costs of restoration to the extent of net insurance proceeds received by Landlord with respect thereto, leasing commissions, or the costs of renovating space for tenants.

If Tenant's total payments of Operating Expenses for any year are less than Tenant's Proportionate Share of actual Operating Expenses for such year, then Tenant shall pay the difference to Landlord within 60 days after demand, and if more, Landlord shall refund any such excess within 30 days following the termination of the Lease Term or any extension terms thereof, provided that Tenant is not in default of its obligations under this Lease. For purposes of calculating Tenant's Proportionate Share of Operating Expenses, a year shall mean a calendar year except the first year, which shall begin on the Commencement Date, and the last year, which shall end on the expiration of this Lease. With respect to Operating Expenses which Landlord allocates to the entire Project, Tenant's "Proportionate Share" shall be the percentage set forth on the first page of this Lease as Tenant's Proportionate Share of the Project as reasonably adjusted by Landlord in the future for changes in the physical size of the Premises or the Project; and, with respect to Operating Expenses which Landlord allocates only to the Building, Tenant's "Proportionate Share" shall be the percentage set forth on the first page of this Lease as Tenant's Proportionate Share of the Building as reasonably adjusted by Landlord in the future for changes in the physical size of the Premises or the Building. Landlord may equitably increase Tenant's Proportionate Share for any item of expense or cost reimbursable by Tenant that relates to a repair, replacement, or service that benefits only the Premises or only a portion of the Project or Building that includes the Premises or that varies with occupancy or use. The estimated Operating Expenses for the Premises set forth on the first page of this Lease are only estimates, and Landlord makes no guaranty or warranty that such estimates will be accurate.

 
3

 

7.              Utilities . Tenant shall pay for all water, gas, electricity, heat, light, power, telephone, sewer, sprinkler services, refuse and trash collection, and other utilities and services used on the Premises, all maintenance charges for utilities, and any storm sewer charges or other similar charges for utilities imposed by any governmental entity or utility provider, together with any taxes, penalties, surcharges or the like pertaining to Tenant's use of the Premises. Landlord may cause at Tenant's expense any utilities to be separately metered or charged directly to Tenant by the provider in the event Landlord reasonably determines that Tenant’s use of such jointly metered utility materially exceeds the use of such jointly metered utility by other tenants in the Building. Tenant shall pay its share of all charges for jointly metered utilities based upon consumption, as reasonably determined by Landlord. No interruption or failure of utilities shall result in the termination of this Lease or the abatement of rent. Tenant agrees to limit use of water and sewer for normal restroom use.

8.              Taxes . Landlord shall pay all taxes, assessments and governmental charges (collectively referred to as "Taxes") that accrue against the Project during the Lease Term, which shall be included as part of the Operating Expenses charged to Tenant. Landlord may contest by appropriate legal proceedings the amount, validity, or application of any Taxes or liens thereof. All capital levies or other taxes assessed or imposed on Landlord upon the rents payable to Landlord under this Lease and any franchise tax, any excise, use, margin, transaction, sales or privilege tax, assessment, levy or charge measured by or based, in whole or in part, upon such rents from the Premises and/or the Project or any portion thereof shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord monthly in estimated installments or upon demand, at the option of Landlord, as additional rent; provided, however, in no event shall Tenant be liable for any net income taxes imposed on Landlord unless such net income taxes are in substitution for any Taxes payable hereunder. If any such tax or excise is levied or assessed directly against Tenant or results from any Tenant-Made Alterations (defined below), then Tenant shall be responsible for and shall pay the same at such times and in such manner as the taxing authority shall require. Tenant shall be liable for all taxes levied or assessed against any personal property or fixtures placed in the Premises, whether levied or assessed against Landlord or Tenant.

9.              Insurance . Landlord shall maintain all risk or special form property insurance covering the full replacement cost of the Building and commercial general liability insurance on the Project in forms and amounts customary for properties substantially similar to the Project, subject to customary deductibles. Landlord may, but is not obligated to, maintain such other insurance and additional coverages as it may deem necessary, including but not limited to, rent loss insurance. All such insurance shall be included as part of the Operating Expenses charged to Tenant. The Project or Building may be included in a blanket policy (in which case the cost of such insurance allocable to the Project or Building will be determined by Landlord based upon the total insurance cost calculations). Tenant shall also reimburse Landlord for any increased premiums or additional insurance which Landlord reasonably deems necessary as a result of Tenant’s use of the Premises.

Tenant, at its expense, shall maintain during the Lease Term the following insurance, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense: (1) commercial general liability insurance applicable to the Premises and its appurtenances providing, on an occurrence basis, a minimum combined single limit of $2,000,000; and in the event property of Tenant’s invitees or customers are kept in, or about the, Premises, Tenant shall maintain warehouser’s legal liability or bailee customers insurance for the full value of the property of such invitees or customers as determined by the warehouse contract between Tenant and its customer; (2) all risk or special form property insurance covering the full replacement cost of all property and improvements installed or placed in the Premises by Tenant; (3) workers’ compensation insurance as required by the state in which the Premises is located and in amounts as may be required by applicable statute and shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of Landlord; (4) employers liability insurance of at least $1,000,000, and (5) business automobile liability insurance having a combined single limit of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence insuring Tenant against liability arising out of the ownership maintenance or use of any owned, hired or nonowned automobiles. Any company writing any of Tenant’s insurance shall have an A.M. Best rating of not less than A-VIII and provide primary coverage to Landlord (any policy issued to Landlord providing duplicate or similar coverage shall be deemed excess over Tenant's policies). All commercial general liability and, if applicable, warehouser’s legal liability or bailee customers insurance policies shall name Tenant as a named insured and Landlord, its property manager, and other designees of Landlord as the interest of such designees shall appear, as additional insureds. The limits and types of insurance maintained by Tenant shall not limit Tenant’s liability under this Lease. Tenant shall provide Landlord with certificates of such insurance as required under this Lease prior to the earlier to occur of the Commencement Date or the date Tenant is provided with possession of the Premises, and thereafter upon renewals at least 15 days prior to the expiration of the insurance coverage. Acceptance by Landlord of delivery of any certificates of insurance does not constitute approval or agreement by Landlord that the insurance requirements of this section have been met, and failure of Landlord to identify a deficiency from evidence provided will not be construed as a waiver of Tenant’s obligation to maintain such insurance. In the event any of the insurance policies required to be carried by Tenant under this Lease shall be cancelled prior to the expiration date of such policy, or if Tenant receives notice of any cancellation of such insurance policies from the insurer prior to the expiration date of such policy, Tenant shall: (a) immediately deliver notice to Landlord that such insurance has been, or is to be, cancelled, (b) shall promptly replace such insurance policy in order to assure no lapse of coverage shall occur, and (c) shall deliver to Landlord a certificate of insurance for such policy.

 
4

 

The all risk or special form property insurance obtained by Landlord and Tenant shall include a waiver of subrogation by the insurers and all rights based upon an assignment from its insured, against Landlord or Tenant, their officers, directors , employees, managers, agents, invitees and contractors, in connection with any loss or damage thereby insured against. Neither party nor its officers, directors, employees, managers, agents, invitees or contractors shall be liable to the other for loss or damage caused by any risk coverable by all risk or special form property insurance, and each party waives any claims against the other party, and its officers, directors, employees, managers, agents, invitees and contractors for such loss or damage. The failure of a party to insure its property shall not void this waiver. Tenant and its agents, employees and contractors shall not be liable for, and Landlord hereby waives all claims against such parties for losses resulting from an interruption of Landlord’s business, or any person claiming through Landlord, resulting from any accident or occurrence in or upon the Premises or the Project from any cause whatsoever, including without limitation, damage caused in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, by the negligence of Tenant or its agents, employees or contractors. Landlord and its agents, employees and contractors shall not be liable for, and Tenant hereby waives all claims against such parties for losses resulting from an interruption of Tenant’s business, or any person claiming through Tenant, resulting from any accident or occurrence in or upon the Premises or the Project from any cause whatsoever, including without limitation, damage caused in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, by the negligence of Landlord or its agents, employees or contractors.

10.             Landlord's Repairs . Landlord shall repair, at its expense and without pass through as an Operating Expense, the structural soundness of the roof (which does not include the roof membrane), the structural soundness of the foundation, and the structural soundness of the exterior walls of the Building in good repair, reasonable wear and tear and uninsured losses and damages caused by Tenant, its agents and contractors excluded. The term "walls" as used in this Paragraph 10 shall not include windows, glass or plate glass, doors or overhead doors, special store fronts, dock bumpers, dock plates or levelers, or office entries. Tenant shall promptly give Landlord written notice of any repair required by Landlord pursuant to this Paragraph 10, after which Landlord shall have a reasonable opportunity to repair.

11.             Tenant's Repairs . Landlord, at Tenant's expense as provided in Paragraph 6, shall maintain in good repair and condition the parking areas and other common areas of the Building, including, but not limited to driveways, alleys, landscape and grounds surrounding the Premises. Subject to Landlord's obligation in Paragraph 10 and subject to Paragraphs 9 and 15, Tenant, at its expense, shall repair, replace and maintain in good condition all portions of the Premises and all areas, improvements and systems exclusively serving the Premises including, without limitation, dock and loading areas, truck doors, plumbing, water and sewer lines up to points of common connection, fire sprinklers and fire protection systems, entries, doors, ceilings, windows, interior walls, and the interior side of demising walls, and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems. Such repair and replacements include capital expenditures and repairs whose benefit may extend beyond the Term, provided in all events Landlord shall complete such capital repairs and such capital expenditures shall be fully amortized in accordance with the Formula (defined hereafter) and reimbursed to Landlord over the remainder of the Lease Term, without regard to any extension or renewal option not then exercised. The "Formula" shall mean that number, the numerator of which shall be the number of months of the Lease Term remaining after such capital expenditures, and the denominator of which shall be the amortization period (in months) equal to the useful life of such repair or replacement multiplied by the cost of such capital expenditure or repair. Landlord shall pay for such capital expenditures and repairs and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for its amortized share of same (determined as hereinabove set forth) in equal monthly installments in the same manner as the payment by Tenant to Landlord of the Operating Expenses. In the event Tenant extends the Lease Term either by way of an option or negotiated extension, such reimbursement by Tenant shall continue as provided above until such amortization period has expired. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems and other mechanical and building systems exclusively serving the Premises shall be maintained at Tenant's expense pursuant to maintenance service contracts entered into by Tenant or, at Landlord's election, by Landlord, in which case the costs of such contracts entered into by Landlord shall be included as an Operating Expense. The scope of services and contractors under such maintenance contracts shall be reasonably approved by Landlord. At Landlord's request, Tenant shall enter into a joint maintenance agreement with any railroad that services the Premises. If Tenant fails to perform any repair or replacement for which it is responsible, Landlord may perform such work and be reimbursed by Tenant within 10 days after demand therefor. Subject to Paragraphs 9 and 15, Tenant shall bear the full cost of any repair or replacement to any part of the Building or Project that results from damage caused by Tenant, its agents, contractors, or invitees and any repair that benefits only the Premises.

 
5

 

12.             Tenant-Made Alterations and Trade Fixtures. Any alterations, additions, or improvements made by or on behalf of Tenant to the Premises ("Tenant-Made Alterations") shall be subject to Landlord's prior written consent (which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed). Tenant shall cause, at its expense, all Tenant-Made Alterations to comply with insurance requirements and with Legal Requirements and shall construct at its expense any alteration or modification required by Legal Requirements as a result of any Tenant-Made Alterations. All Tenant-Made Alterations shall be constructed in a good and workmanlike manner by contractors reasonably acceptable to Landlord and only good grades of materials shall be used. All plans and specifications for any Tenant-Made Alterations shall be submitted to Landlord for its approval. Landlord may monitor construction of the Tenant-Made Alterations. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for its reasonable, actual out-of-pocket costs paid to third parties in reviewing plans and specifications and in monitoring construction for non-standard improvements for which Landlord does not have in-house expertise for reviewing the plans and specifications and monitoring construction. Landlord's right to review plans and specifications and to monitor construction shall be solely for its own benefit, and Landlord shall have no duty to see that such plans and specifications or construction comply with applicable laws, codes, rules and regulations. Tenant shall provide Landlord with the identities and mailing addresses of all persons performing work or supplying materials, prior to beginning such construction, and Landlord may post on and about the Premises notices of non-responsibility pursuant to applicable law. Tenant shall furnish security or make other arrangements satisfactory to Landlord to assure payment for the completion of all work free and clear of liens and shall provide certificates of insurance for worker's compensation and other coverage in amounts and from an insurance company satisfactory to Landlord protecting Landlord against liability for personal injury or property damage during construction. Upon completion of any Tenant-Made Alterations, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord sworn statements setting forth the names of all contractors and subcontractors who did work on the Tenant-Made Alterations and final lien waivers from all such contractors and subcontractors. Upon surrender of the Premises, all Tenant-Made Alterations and any leasehold improvements constructed by Landlord or Tenant shall remain on the Premises as Landlord's property, except to the extent Landlord requires removal at Tenant's expense of any such items or Landlord and Tenant have otherwise agreed in writing in connection with Landlord's consent to any Tenant-Made Alterations. Upon Tenant's written request, Landlord shall provide Tenant, at the time of Tenant's request for approval of Tenant-Made Alterations, a list of which Tenant-Made Alterations Landlord will require Tenant to remove upon surrender of the Premises. Tenant shall repair any damage caused by the removal of such Tenant-Made Alterations upon surrender of the Premises.

Subject to Landlord’s approval of the plans and specifications related thereto, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, and subject to Landlord’s roof rights set forth in Paragraph 37(o), Landlord hereby agrees to permit Tenant to install at its sole cost and expense a heating, ventilation and air conditioning system and an uninterrupted power source generator on the roof of the Building. Upon surrender of the Premises, at Landlord’s election, such Tenant-Made Alterations shall remain on the Premises as Landlord's property, except to the extent Landlord requires removal at Tenant's expense of any such items or Landlord and Tenant have otherwise agreed in writing in connection with Landlord's consent to such Tenant-Made Alterations. Tenant shall repair any damage caused by such removal.

 
6

 

Tenant, at its own cost and expense and without Landlord's prior approval, may erect such shelves, racking, bins, machinery and trade fixtures (collectively "Trade Fixtures") in the ordinary course of its business provided that such items do not alter the basic character of the Premises, do not overload or damage the Premises, and may be removed without injury to the Premises, and the construction, erection, and installation thereof complies with all Legal Requirements and with Landlord's requirements set forth above. Tenant shall remove its Trade Fixtures and shall repair any damage caused by such removal upon surrender of the Premises.

13.             Signs . Except as set forth on Exhibit C, Tenant shall not make any changes to the exterior of the Premises, install any exterior lights, decorations, balloons, flags, pennants, banners, or painting, or erect or install any signs, windows or door lettering, placards, decorations, or advertising media of any type which can be viewed from the exterior of the Premises, without Landlord's prior written consent, not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. Upon surrender or vacation of the Premises, Tenant shall have removed all signs and repair, paint, and/or replace the building facia surface to which its signs are attached. Tenant shall obtain all applicable governmental permits and approvals for sign and exterior treatments. All signs, decorations, advertising media, blinds, draperies and other window treatment or bars or other security installations visible from outside the Premises shall be subject to Landlord's approval and conform in all respects to Landlord's requirements.

14.             Parking . Tenant shall be entitled to park in common with other tenants of the Project in those areas designated for nonreserved parking. Landlord may allocate parking spaces among Tenant and other tenants in the Project if Landlord reasonably determines that such parking facilities are becoming crowded. Landlord shall not be responsible for enforcing Tenant's parking rights against any third parties.

15.             Restoration. If at any time during the Lease Term the Premises are damaged by a fire or other casualty, Landlord shall notify Tenant within 30 days after such damage as to the amount of time Landlord reasonably estimates it will take to restore the Premises. If the restoration time is estimated to exceed 5 months, either Landlord or Tenant may elect to terminate this Lease upon notice to the other party given no later than 30 days after Landlord's notice. If neither party elects to terminate this Lease or if Landlord estimates that restoration will take 5 months or less, then, subject to receipt of sufficient insurance proceeds, Landlord shall promptly restore the Premises excluding the improvements installed by Tenant or by Landlord and paid by Tenant, subject to delays arising from the collection of insurance proceeds or from Force Majeure events. Tenant at Tenant's expense shall promptly perform, subject to delays arising from the collection of insurance proceeds, or from Force Majeure events, all repairs or restoration not required to be done by Landlord and shall promptly re-enter the Premises and commence doing business in accordance with this Lease. A party’s failure to maintain the insurance required by this Lease shall not impair the other party’s rights hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, either party may terminate this Lease if the Premises are damaged during the last year of the Lease Term and Landlord reasonably estimates that it will take more than one month to repair such damage. Base Rent and Operating Expenses shall be abated for the period of repair and restoration commencing on the date of such casualty event in the proportion which the area of the Premises, if any, which is not usable by Tenant bears to the total area of the Premises. Such abatement shall be the sole remedy of Tenant, and except as provided herein, Tenant waives any right to terminate the Lease by reason of damage or casualty loss.

Notwithstanding anything contained in the Lease to the contrary, to the extent the damage to the Project is attributable to Tenant, Tenant shall pay to Landlord with respect to any damage to the Project an amount of the commercially reasonable deductible under Landlord's insurance policy, not to exceed $10,000.00, within 30 days after presentment of Landlord's invoice

16.             Condemnation . If any part of the Premises or the Project should be taken for any public or quasi-public use under governmental law, ordinance, or regulation, or by right of eminent domain, or by private purchase in lieu thereof (a "Taking" or "Taken"), and the Taking would materially interfere with or impair Landlord’s ownership or operation of the Project, then upon written notice by Landlord this Lease shall terminate and Base Rent shall be apportioned as of said date. If part of the Premises shall be Taken, and this Lease is not terminated as provided above, the Base Rent payable hereunder during the unexpired Lease Term shall be reduced to such extent as may be fair and reasonable under the circumstances. In the event of any such Taking, Landlord shall be entitled to receive the entire price or award from any such Taking without any payment to Tenant, and Tenant hereby assigns to Landlord Tenant's interest, if any, in such award. Tenant shall have the right, to the extent that same shall not diminish Landlord's award, to make a separate claim against the condemning authority (but not Landlord) for such compensation as may be separately awarded or recoverable by Tenant for moving expenses and damage to Tenant's Trade Fixtures, if a separate award for such items is made to Tenant.

 
7

 

17.             Assignment and Subletting . Without Landlord's prior written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld conditioned or delayed, Tenant shall not assign this Lease or sublease the Premises or any part thereof or mortgage, pledge, or hypothecate its leasehold interest or grant any concession or license within the Premises and any attempt to do any of the foregoing shall be void and of no effect. It shall be reasonable for the Landlord to withhold, delay or condition its consent, where required, to any assignment or sublease in any of the following instances: (i) occupancy of the Premises by the assignee or sublessee would, in Landlord's opinion, violate any agreement binding upon Landlord or the Project with regard to the identity of tenants, usage in the Project, or similar matters; (ii) the identity or business reputation of the assignee or sublessee will, in the good faith judgment of Landlord, tend to damage the goodwill or reputation of the Project; or (iii) in the case of a sublease, the subtenant has not acknowledged that the Lease controls over any inconsistent provision in the sublease. The foregoing criteria shall not exclude any other reasonable basis for Landlord to refuse its consent to such assignment or sublease. Any approved assignment or sublease shall be expressly subject to the terms and conditions of this Lease. Tenant shall provide to Landlord all information concerning the assignee or sublessee as Landlord may reasonably request. Landlord may revoke its consent immediately and without notice if, as of the effective date of the assignment or sublease, there has occurred and is continuing any default under the Lease. For purposes of this paragraph, a transfer of the ownership interests controlling Tenant shall be deemed an assignment of this Lease unless such ownership interests are publicly traded. Notwithstanding the above, Tenant may assign or sublet the Premises, or any part thereof, to any entity controlling Tenant, controlled by Tenant or under common control with Tenant (a "Tenant Affiliate"), without the prior written consent of Landlord. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all of Landlord's reasonable expenses in connection with any assignment or sublease not to exceed $1,500.00. Upon Landlord's receipt of Tenant's written notice of a desire to assign or sublet the Premises, or any part thereof, or Tenant’s written notice of Tenant’s lease rates and terms by which Tenant intends to seek a subtenant or assignee (other than to a Tenant Affiliate), Landlord may, by giving written notice to Tenant within 30 days after receipt of Tenant's notice, terminate this Lease with respect to the space described in Tenant's notice, as of the date specified in Tenant's notice for the commencement of the proposed assignment or sublease. Tenant may withdraw its notice to sublease or assign by notifying Landlord within 10 days after Landlord has given Tenant notice of such termination, in which case the Lease shall not terminate but shall continue. If Landlord has previously indicated that it will not exercise a recapture right as set forth above, then Landlord shall be bound by that decision with respect to the proposed sublease or assignment then being requested.

Notwithstanding any assignment or subletting, Tenant and any guarantor or surety of Tenant's obligations under this Lease shall at all times remain fully responsible and liable for the payment of the rent and for compliance with all of Tenant's other obligations under this Lease (regardless of whether Landlord's approval has been obtained for any such assignments or sublettings). In the event that the rent due and payable by a sublessee or assignee (or a combination of the rental payable under such sublease or assignment plus any bonus or other consideration therefor or incident thereto) exceeds the rental payable under this Lease, then Tenant shall be bound and obligated to pay Landlord as additional rent hereunder equal to 50% of all such excess rental (after deducting Tenant’s reasonable, out-of-pocket costs to sublease) and 50% of other excess consideration within 10 days following receipt thereof by Tenant; provided in the event of a sublease which is less than 100% of the Premises such excess rental and other consideration shall be applied on a square foot basis.

If this Lease be assigned or if the Premises be subleased (whether in whole or in part) or in the event of the mortgage, pledge, or hypothecation of Tenant's leasehold interest or grant of any concession or license within the Premises or if the Premises be occupied in whole or in part by anyone other than Tenant, then upon a default by Tenant hereunder Landlord may collect rent from the assignee, sublessee, mortgagee, pledgee, party to whom the leasehold interest was hypothecated, concessionee or licensee or other occupant and, except to the extent set forth in the preceding paragraph, apply the amount collected to the next rent payable hereunder; and all such rentals collected by Tenant shall be held in trust for Landlord and immediately forwarded to Landlord. No such transaction or collection of rent or application thereof by Landlord, however, shall be deemed a waiver of these provisions or a release of Tenant from the further performance by Tenant of its covenants, duties, or obligations hereunder.

 
8

 

18.             Indemnification .   Except for the negligence of Landlord, its agents, employees or contractors, and to the extent permitted by law, Tenant agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Landlord, and Landlord's agents, employees and contractors, from and against any and all losses, liabilities, damages, costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees) resulting from claims by third parties for injuries to any person and damage to or theft or misappropriation or loss of property occurring in or about the Project and arising from the use and occupancy of the Premises or from any activity, work, or thing done, permitted or suffered by Tenant in or about the Premises or due to any other act or omission of Tenant, its subtenants, assignees, invitees, employees, contractors and agents. The furnishing of insurance required hereunder shall not be deemed to limit Tenant's obligations under this Paragraph 18.

Except for the negligence of Tenant, its agents, employees or contractors, and to the extent permitted by law, Landlord agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Tenant, and Tenant's agents, employees and contractors, from and against any and all losses, liabilities, damages, costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees) resulting from claims by third parties for injuries to any person and damage to or theft or misappropriation or loss of property occurring in or about the Project or arising from any activity, work, or thing done, permitted or suffered by Landlord in or about the Project or due to any other act or omission of Landlord, its assignees, invitees, employees, contractors and agents. The furnishing of insurance required hereunder shall not be deemed to limit Landlord's obligations under this Paragraph 18.

If a claim under the foregoing indemnity is made against the indemnitee which the indemnitee believes to be covered by an indemnitor's indemnification obligations hereunder, the indemnitee shall promptly notify the indemnitor of the claim and, in such notice shall offer to the indemnitor the opportunity to assume the defense of the claim within 10 business days after receipt of the notice (with counsel reasonably acceptable to the indemnitee). If the indemnitor timely elects to assume the defense of the claim, the indemnitor shall have the right to settle the claim on any terms it considers reasonable and without the indemnitee's prior written consent, as long as the settlement shall not require the indemnitee to render any performance or pay any consideration, and the indemnitee shall not have the right to settle any such claim. If the indemnitor fails timely to elect to assume the defense of the claim or fails to defend the claim with diligence, then the indemnitee shall have the right to take over the defense of the claim and to settle the claim on any terms the indemnitee considers reasonable. Any such settlement shall be valid as against the indemnitor. If the indemnitor assumes the defense of a claim, the indemnitee may employ its own counsel but such employment shall be at the sole expense of the indemnitee. If any such claim arises out of the negligence of both Landlord and Tenant, responsibility for such claim shall be allocated between Landlord and Tenant based on their respective degrees of negligence.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, this indemnity does not cover claims arising from the presence or release of Hazardous Materials, and Landlord’s indemnification obligations shall be null and void in the event Tenant’s tangible net worth is less than $50 million or Tenant is not a publically traded company.

19.             Inspection and Access . Landlord and its agents, representatives, and contractors may enter the Premises at any reasonable time and upon at least 24-hours prior notice (except in the event of an emergency, in which case such notice shall not be required) to inspect the Premises and to make such repairs as may be required or permitted pursuant to this Lease and for any other business purpose. Landlord and Landlord's representatives may enter the Premises during business hours with at least 24 hours prior notice for the purpose of showing the Premises to prospective purchasers and, during the last year of the Lease Term, to prospective tenants. Landlord may erect a suitable sign on the Premises stating the Premises are available to let or that the Project is available for sale. Landlord may grant easements, make public dedications, designate common areas and create restrictions on or about the Premises, provided that no such easement, dedication, designation or restriction materially interferes with Tenant's use or occupancy of the Premises. At Landlord's request, Tenant shall execute such instruments as may be necessary for such easements, dedications or restrictions.

20.             Quiet Enjoyment . If Tenant shall perform all of the covenants and agreements herein required to be performed by Tenant, Tenant shall, subject to the terms of this Lease, at all times during the Lease Term, have peaceful and quiet enjoyment of the Premises against any person claiming by, through or under Landlord.

21.             Surrender . Upon termination of the Lease Term or earlier termination of Tenant's right of possession, Tenant shall surrender the Premises to Landlord in the same condition as received, ordinary wear and tear, casualty loss and condemnation covered by Paragraphs 15 and 16 excepted. Any Trade Fixtures, Tenant-Made Alterations and property not so removed by Tenant as permitted or required herein shall be deemed abandoned and may be stored, removed, and disposed of by Landlord at Tenant's expense, and Tenant waives all claims against Landlord for any damages resulting from Landlord's retention and disposition of such property. All obligations of Tenant hereunder not fully performed as of the termination of the Lease Term shall survive the termination of the Lease Term, including without limitation, indemnity obligations, payment obligations with respect to Operating Expenses and obligations concerning the condition and repair of the Premises.

 
9

 

22.             Holding Over . If Tenant retains possession of the Premises after the termination of the Lease Term, unless otherwise agreed in writing, such possession shall be subject to immediate termination by Landlord at any time, and all of the other terms and provisions of this Lease (excluding any expansion or renewal option or other similar right or option) shall be applicable during such holdover period, except that Tenant shall pay Landlord from time to time, upon demand, as Base Rent for the holdover period, an amount equal to 150% of the Base Rent in effect on the termination date, computed on a monthly basis for each month or part thereof during such holding over. All other payments shall continue under the terms of this Lease. In addition, Tenant shall be liable for all damages incurred by Landlord as a result of such holding over. No holding over by Tenant, whether with or without consent of Landlord, shall operate to extend this Lease except as otherwise expressly provided, and this Paragraph 22 shall not be construed as consent for Tenant to retain possession of the Premises. For purposes of this Paragraph 22, “possession of the Premises” shall continue until, among other things, Tenant has delivered all keys to the Premises to Landlord, Landlord has complete and total dominion and control over the Premises, and Tenant has completely fulfilled all obligations required of it upon termination of the Lease as set forth in this Lease, including, without limitation, those concerning the condition and repair of the Premises.

23.             Events of Default . Each of the following events shall be an event of default ("Event of Default") by Tenant under this Lease:

(i)             Tenant shall fail to pay any installment of Base Rent or any other payment required herein when due, and such failure shall continue for a period of 5 days after written notice from Landlord to Tenant that such payment was due; provided, however, that Landlord shall not be obligated to provide written notice of such failure more than 2 times in any consecutive 12-month period, and the failure of Tenant to pay any third or subsequent installment of Base Rent or any other payment required herein when due in any consecutive 12-month period shall constitute an Event of Default by Tenant under this Lease without the requirement of notice or opportunity to cure; provided, however, that any such notice shall be in lieu of, and not in addition to, any notice required under applicable law.

(ii)            Tenant or any guarantor or surety of Tenant's obligations hereunder shall (A) make a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; (B) commence any case, proceeding or other action seeking to have an order for relief entered on its behalf as a debtor or to adjudicate it as bankrupt or insolvent, or seeking reorganization, arrangement, adjustment, liquidation, dissolution or composition of it or its debts or seeking appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official for it or for all or of any substantial part of its property (collectively a "proceeding for relief"); (C) become the subject of any proceeding for relief which is not dismissed within 60 days of its filing or entry; or (D) die or suffer a legal disability (if Tenant, guarantor, or surety is an individual) or be dissolved or otherwise fail to maintain its legal existence (if Tenant, guarantor or surety is a corporation, partnership or other entity).

(iii)           Any insurance required to be maintained by Tenant pursuant to this Lease shall be cancelled or terminated or shall expire or shall be reduced or materially changed, except, in each case, as permitted in this Lease.

(iv)           Tenant shall not occupy or shall vacate the Premises whether or not Tenant is in monetary or other default under this Lease. Tenant's vacating of the Premises shall not constitute an Event of Default if, prior to vacating the Premises, Tenant has made arrangements reasonably acceptable to Landlord to (a) ensure that Tenant's insurance for the Premises will not be voided or cancelled with respect to the Premises as a result of such vacancy, (b) ensure that the Premises are secured and not subject to vandalism, and (c) ensure that the Premises will be properly maintained after such vacation, including, but not limited to, keeping the heating, ventilation and cooling systems maintenance contracts required by this Lease in full force and effect. Tenant shall inspect the Premises at least once each month and report monthly in writing to Landlord on the condition of the Premises.

 
10

 

(v)            Tenant shall attempt or there shall occur any assignment, subleasing or other transfer of Tenant's interest in or with respect to this Lease except as otherwise permitted in this Lease.

(vi)           Tenant shall fail to discharge any lien placed upon the Premises in violation of this Lease within 30 days after any such lien or encumbrance is filed against the Premises.

(vii)          Tenant shall fail to comply with any provision of this Lease other than those specifically referred to in this Paragraph 23, and except as otherwise expressly provided herein, such default shall continue for more than 30 days after Landlord shall have given Tenant written notice of such default.

24.             Landlord's Remedies . Upon each occurrence of an Event of Default and so long as such Event of Default shall be continuing, Landlord may at any time thereafter at its election: terminate this Lease or Tenant's right of possession, (but Tenant shall remain liable as hereinafter provided) and/or pursue any other remedies at law or in equity. Upon the termination of this Lease or termination of Tenant's right of possession, it shall be lawful for Landlord, without formal demand or notice of any kind, to re-enter the Premises by summary dispossession proceedings or any other action or proceeding authorized by law and to remove Tenant and all persons and property therefrom. If Landlord re-enters the Premises, Landlord shall have the right to keep in place and use, or remove and store, all of the furniture, fixtures and equipment at the Premises.

Except as otherwise provided in the next paragraph, if Tenant breaches this Lease and abandoned the Premises prior to the end of the term hereof, or if Tenant's right to possession is terminated by Landlord because of an Event of Default by Tenant under this Lease, this Lease shall terminate. Upon such termination, Landlord may recover from Tenant the following, as provided in Section 1951.2 of the Civil Code of California: (i) the worth at the time of award of the unpaid Base Rent and other charges under this Lease that had been earned at the time of termination; (ii) the worth at the time of award of the amount by which the reasonable value of the unpaid Base Rent and other charges under this Lease which would have been earned after termination until the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonable avoided; (iii) the worth at the time of award by which the reasonable value of the unpaid Base Rent and other charges under this Lease for the balance of the term of this Lease after the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided; and (iv) any other amount necessary to compensate Landlord for all the detriment proximately caused by Tenant's failure to perform its obligations under this Lease or that in the ordinary course of things would be likely to result therefrom. As used herein, the following terms are defined: (a) The "worth at the time of award" of the amounts referred to in Sections (i) and (ii) is computed by allowing interest at the lesser of 18 percent per annum or the maximum lawful rate. The "worth at the time of award" of the amount referred to in Section (iii) is computed by discounting such amount at the discount rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time of award plus one percent; (b) The "time of award" as used in clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) above is the date on which judgment is entered by a court of competent jurisdiction; (c) The "reasonable value" of the amount referred to in clause (ii) above is computed by determining the mathematical product of (1) the "reasonable annual rental value" (as defined herein) and (2) the number of years, including fractional parts thereof, between the date of termination and the time of award. The "reasonable value" of the amount referred to in clause (iii) is computed by determining the mathematical product of (1) the annual Base Rent and other charges under this Lease and (2) the number of years including fractional parts thereof remaining in the balance of the term of this Lease after the time of award.

Even though Tenant has breached this Lease and abandoned the Premises, this Lease shall continue in effect for so long as Landlord does not terminate Tenant's right to possession, and Landlord may enforce all its rights and remedies under this Lease, including the right to recover rent as it becomes due. This remedy is intended to be the remedy described in California Civil Code Section 1951.4, and the following provision from such Civil Code Section is hereby repeated: "The Lessor has the remedy described in California Civil Code Section 1951.4 (lessor may continue lease in effect after lessee's breach and abandonment and recover rent as it becomes due, if lessee has right to sublet or assign subject only to reasonable limitations)." Any such payments due Landlord shall be made upon demand therefor from time to time and Tenant agrees that Landlord may file suit to recover any sums falling due from time to time. Notwithstanding any such reletting without termination, Landlord may at any time thereafter elect in writing to terminate this Lease for such previous breach.

 
11

 

Exercise by Landlord of any one or more remedies hereunder granted or otherwise available shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of surrender of the Premises and/or a termination of this Lease by Landlord, whether by agreement or by operation of law, it being understood that such surrender and/or termination can be effected only by the written agreement of Landlord and Tenant. Any law, usage, or custom to the contrary notwithstanding, Landlord shall have the right at all times to enforce the provisions of this Lease in strict accordance with the terms hereof; and the failure of Landlord at any time to enforce its rights under this Lease strictly in accordance with same shall not be construed as having created a custom in any way or manner contrary to the specific terms, provisions, and covenants of this Lease or as having modified the same. Tenant and Landlord further agree that forbearance or waiver by Landlord to enforce its rights pursuant to this Lease or at law or in equity, shall not be a waiver of Landlord's right to enforce one or more of its rights in connection with any subsequent default. A receipt by Landlord of rent or other payment with knowledge of the breach of any covenant hereof shall not be deemed a waiver of such breach, and no waiver by Landlord of any provision of this Lease shall be deemed to have been made unless expressed in writing and signed by Landlord. To the greatest extent permitted by law, Tenant waives the service of notice of Landlord's intention to re-enter as provided for in any statute, or to institute legal proceedings to that end, and also waives all right of redemption in case Tenant shall be dispossessed by a judgment or by warrant of any court or judge. The terms "enter," "re-enter," "entry" or "re-entry," as used in this Lease, are not restricted to their technical legal meanings. Any reletting of the Premises shall be on such terms and conditions as Landlord in its sole discretion may determine (including without limitation a term different than the remaining Lease Term, rental concessions, alterations and repair of the Premises, lease of less than the entire Premises to any tenant and leasing any or all other portions of the Project before reletting the Premises). Landlord shall not be liable, nor shall Tenant's obligations hereunder be diminished because of, Landlord's failure to relet the Premises or collect rent due in respect of such reletting.

25.             Tenant's Remedies/Limitation of Liability . Landlord shall not be in default hereunder unless Landlord fails to perform any of its obligations hereunder within 30 days after written notice from Tenant specifying such failure (unless such performance will, due to the nature of the obligation, require a period of time in excess of 30 days, then after such period of time as is reasonably necessary). All obligations of Landlord hereunder shall be construed as covenants, not conditions; and, except as may be otherwise expressly provided in this Lease, Tenant may not terminate this Lease for breach of Landlord's obligations hereunder. All obligations of Landlord under this Lease will be binding upon Landlord only during the period of its ownership of the Premises and not thereafter. The term "Landlord" in this Lease shall mean only the owner, for the time being of the Premises, and in the event of the transfer by such owner of its interest in the Premises, such owner shall thereupon be released and discharged from all obligations of Landlord thereafter accruing, but such obligations shall be binding during the Lease Term upon each new owner for the duration of such owner's ownership. Any liability of Landlord under this Lease shall be limited solely to its interest in the Project, and in no event shall any personal liability be asserted against Landlord in connection with this Lease nor shall any recourse be had to any other property or assets of Landlord.

26.             Waiver of Jury Trial . TENANT AND LANDLORD WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY OR TO HAVE A JURY PARTICIPATE IN RESOLVING ANY DISPUTE, WHETHER SOUNDING IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, BETWEEN LANDLORD AND TENANT ARISING OUT OF THIS LEASE OR ANY OTHER INSTRUMENT, DOCUMENT, OR AGREEMENT EXECUTED OR DELIVERED IN CONNECTION HEREWITH OR THE TRANSACTIONS RELATED HERETO.

27.             Subordination . This Lease and Tenant's interest and rights hereunder are and shall be subject and subordinate at all times to the lien of any first mortgage, now existing or hereafter created on or against the Project or the Premises, and all amendments, restatements, renewals, modifications, consolidations, refinancing, assignments and extensions thereof, without the necessity of any further instrument or act on the part of Tenant. Tenant agrees, at the election of the holder of any such mortgage, to attorn to any such holder. Tenant agrees upon demand to execute, acknowledge and deliver such instruments, confirming such subordination and such instruments of attornment as shall be requested by any such holder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any such holder may at any time subordinate its mortgage to this Lease, without Tenant's consent, by notice in writing to Tenant, and thereupon this Lease shall be deemed prior to such mortgage without regard to their respective dates of execution, delivery or recording and in that event such holder shall have the same rights with respect to this Lease as though this Lease had been executed prior to the execution, delivery and recording of such mortgage and had been assigned to such holder. The term "mortgage" whenever used in this Lease shall be deemed to include deeds of trust, security assignments and any other encumbrances, and any reference to the "holder" of a mortgage shall be deemed to include the beneficiary under a deed of trust.

 
12

 

28.             Mechanic's Liens . Tenant has no express or implied authority to create or place any lien or encumbrance of any kind upon, or in any manner to bind the interest of Landlord or Tenant in, the Premises or to charge the rentals payable hereunder for any claim in favor of any person dealing with Tenant, including those who may furnish materials or perform labor for any construction or repairs. Tenant covenants and agrees that it will pay or cause to be paid all sums legally due and payable by it on account of any labor performed or materials furnished in connection with any work performed on the Premises and that it will save and hold Landlord harmless from all loss, cost or expense based on or arising out of asserted claims or liens against the leasehold estate or against the interest of Landlord in the Premises or under this Lease. Tenant shall give Landlord immediate written notice of the placing of any lien or encumbrance against the Premises and cause such lien or encumbrance to be discharged within 30 days of the filing or recording thereof; provided, however, Tenant may contest such liens or encumbrances as long as such contest prevents foreclosure of the lien or encumbrance and Tenant causes such lien or encumbrance to be bonded or insured over in a manner satisfactory to Landlord within such 30 day period.

29.             Estoppel Certificates . Tenant agrees, from time to time, within 10 days after request of Landlord, to execute and deliver to Landlord, or Landlord's designee, any estoppel certificate requested by Landlord, stating that this Lease is in full force and effect, the date to which rent has been paid, that Landlord is not in default hereunder (or specifying in detail the nature of Landlord's default), the termination date of this Lease and such other matters pertaining to this Lease as may be requested by Landlord. Tenant's obligation to furnish each estoppel certificate in a timely fashion is a material inducement for Landlord's execution of this Lease. No cure or grace period provided in this Lease shall apply to Tenant's obligations to timely deliver an estoppel certificate.

30.             Environmental Requirements . Except for Hazardous Material contained in products used by Tenant in de minimis quantities for ordinary cleaning and office purposes, Tenant shall not permit or cause any party to bring any Hazardous Material upon the Premises or transport, store, use, generate, manufacture or release any Hazardous Material in or about the Premises without Landlord's prior written consent. Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall operate its business in the Premises in strict compliance with all Environmental Requirements and shall remediate in a manner satisfactory to Landlord any Hazardous Materials released on or from the Project by Tenant, its agents, employees, contractors, subtenants or invitees. Tenant shall complete and certify to disclosure statements as requested by Landlord from time to time relating to Tenant's transportation, storage, use, generation, manufacture or release of Hazardous Materials on the Premises. The term "Environmental Requirements" means all applicable present and future statutes, regulations, ordinances, rules, codes, judgments, orders or other similar enactments of any governmental authority or agency regulating or relating to health, safety, or environmental conditions on, under, or about the Premises or the environment, including without limitation, the following: the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act; the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act; and all state and local counterparts thereto, and any regulations or policies promulgated or issued thereunder. The term "Hazardous Materials" means and includes any substance, material, waste, pollutant, or contaminant listed or defined as hazardous or toxic, under any Environmental Requirements, asbestos and petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof, natural gas liquids, liquefied natural gas, or synthetic gas usable for fuel (or mixtures of natural gas and such synthetic gas). As defined in Environmental Requirements, Tenant is and shall be deemed to be the "operator" of Tenant's "facility" and the "owner" of all Hazardous Materials brought on the Premises by Tenant, its agents, employees, contractors or invitees, and the wastes, by-products, or residues generated, resulting, or produced therefrom.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Paragraph 30, Tenant shall have no liability of any kind to Landlord as to Hazardous Materials on the Premises caused or permitted by (i) Landlord, its agents, employees, contractors or invitees; or (ii) any other tenants in the Project or their agents, employees, contractors, subtenants, assignees or invitees.

Tenant shall indemnify, defend, and hold Landlord harmless from and against any and all losses (including, without limitation, diminution in value of the Premises or the Project and loss of rental income from the Project), claims, demands, actions, suits, damages (including, without limitation, punitive damages), expenses (including, without limitation, remediation, removal, repair, corrective action, or cleanup expenses), and costs (including, without limitation, actual attorneys' fees, consultant fees or expert fees and including, without limitation, removal or management of any asbestos brought into the property or disturbed in breach of the requirements of this Paragraph 30, regardless of whether such removal or management is required by law) which are brought or recoverable against, or suffered or incurred by Landlord as a result of any release of Hazardous Materials for which Tenant is obligated to remediate as provided above or any other breach of the requirements under this Paragraph 30 by Tenant, its agents, employees, contractors, subtenants, assignees or invitees, regardless of whether Tenant had knowledge of such noncompliance. The obligations of Tenant under this Paragraph 30 shall survive any termination of this Lease.

 
13

 

Landlord shall have access to, and a right to perform inspections and tests of, the Premises to determine Tenant's compliance with Environmental Requirements, its obligations under this Paragraph 30, or the environmental condition of the Premises. Access shall be granted to Landlord upon Landlord's prior notice to Tenant and at such times so as to minimize, so far as may be reasonable under the circumstances, any disturbance to Tenant's operations. Such inspections and tests shall be conducted at Landlord's expense, unless such inspections or tests reveal that Tenant has not complied with any Environmental Requirement, in which case Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the reasonable cost of such inspection and tests. Landlord's receipt of or satisfaction with any environmental assessment in no way waives any rights that Landlord holds against Tenant.

31.             Rules and Regulations . Tenant shall, at all times during the Lease Term and any extension thereof, comply with all reasonable rules and regulations at any time or from time to time established by Landlord covering use of the Premises and the Project. The current rules and regulations are attached hereto. In the event of any conflict between said rules and regulations and other provisions of this Lease, the other terms and provisions of this Lease shall control. Landlord shall not have any liability or obligation for the breach of any rules or regulations by other tenants in the Project.

32.             Security Service . Tenant acknowledges and agrees that, while Landlord may patrol the Project, Landlord is not providing any security services with respect to the Premises and that Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for, and Tenant waives any claim against Landlord with respect to, any loss by theft or any other damage suffered or incurred by Tenant in connection with any unauthorized entry into the Premises or any other breach of security with respect to the Premises.

33.             Force Majeure . Landlord shall not be held responsible for delays in the performance of its obligations hereunder when caused by strikes, lockouts, labor disputes, acts of God, inability to obtain labor or materials or reasonable substitutes therefor, governmental restrictions, governmental regulations, governmental controls, delay in issuance of permits, enemy or hostile governmental action, civil commotion, fire or other casualty, and other causes beyond the reasonable control of Landlord ("Force Majeure").

34.             Entire Agreement . This Lease constitutes the complete agreement of Landlord and Tenant with respect to the subject matter hereof. No representations, inducements, promises or agreements, oral or written, have been made by Landlord or Tenant, or anyone acting on behalf of Landlord or Tenant, which are not contained herein, and any prior agreements, promises, negotiations, or representations are superseded by this Lease. This Lease may not be amended except by an instrument in writing signed by both parties hereto.

35.             Severability . If any clause or provision of this Lease is illegal, invalid or unenforceable under present or future laws, then and in that event, it is the intention of the parties hereto that the remainder of this Lease shall not be affected thereby. It is also the intention of the parties to this Lease that in lieu of each clause or provision of this Lease that is illegal, invalid or unenforceable, there be added, as a part of this Lease, a clause or provision as similar in terms to such illegal, invalid or unenforceable clause or provision as may be possible and be legal, valid and enforceable.

36.             Brokers . Tenant represents and warrants that it has dealt with no broker, agent or other person in connection with this transaction and that no broker, agent or other person brought about this transaction, other than the broker, if any, set forth on the first page of this Lease, and Tenant agrees to indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from and against any claims by any other broker, agent or other person claiming a commission or other form of compensation by virtue of having dealt with Tenant with regard to this leasing transaction.

37.             Miscellaneous .            (a)            Any payments or charges due from Tenant to Landlord hereunder shall be considered rent for all purposes of this Lease.

 
14

 

(b)            If and when included within the term "Tenant," as used in this instrument, there is more than one person, firm or corporation, each shall be jointly and severally liable for the obligations of Tenant.

(c)            All notices required or permitted to be given under this Lease shall be in writing and shall be sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, or by a reputable national overnight courier service, postage prepaid, or by hand delivery addressed to the parties at their addresses below, and with a copy sent to Landlord at IndCor Properties, Inc. c/o Lease Administration, Two North Riverside Plaza, Suite #1900, Chicago, Illinois 60606 and IndCor Properties, Inc. c/o Charles Sullivan, 7887 East Belleview Avenue, Suite 325, Denver, Colorado 80111. Either party may by notice given aforesaid change its address for all subsequent notices or add an additional party to be copied on all subsequent notices. Except where otherwise expressly provided to the contrary, notice shall be deemed given upon delivery.

(d)            Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Lease or as otherwise required by law, Landlord retains the absolute right to withhold any consent or approval.

(e)            In the event of (i) a default by Tenant of its obligations under the Lease, or (ii) a need by Landlord to effectuate a financing transaction or sale of the Building, or (iii) an assignment or subletting of the Lease by Tenant, then at Landlord's request from time to time Tenant shall furnish Landlord with true and complete copies of its most recent annual and quarterly financial statements prepared by Tenant or Tenant's accountants and any other financial information or summaries that Tenant typically provides to its lenders or shareholders.

(f)            Neither this Lease nor a memorandum of lease shall be filed by or on behalf of Tenant in any public record. Landlord may prepare and file, and upon request by Landlord Tenant will execute, a memorandum of lease.

(g)            The normal rule of construction to the effect that any ambiguities are to be resolved against the drafting party shall not be employed in the interpretation of this Lease or any exhibits or amendments hereto.

(h)            The submission by Landlord to Tenant of this Lease shall have no binding force or effect, shall not constitute an option for the leasing of the Premises, nor confer any right or impose any obligations upon either party until execution of this Lease by both parties.

(i)            Words of any gender used in this Lease shall be held and construed to include any other gender, and words in the singular number shall be held to include the plural, unless the context otherwise requires. The captions inserted in this Lease are for convenience only and in no way define, limit or otherwise describe the scope or intent of this Lease, or any provision hereof, or in any way affect the interpretation of this Lease.

(j)            Any amount not paid by Tenant within 5 days after notice from Landlord to Tenant that such payment was due (provided, however, that Landlord shall not be obligated to provide written notice of such failure more than 2 times in any consecutive 12-month period) shall bear interest from such due date until paid in full at the lesser of the highest rate permitted by applicable law or 15 percent per year. It is expressly the intent of Landlord and Tenant at all times to comply with applicable law governing the maximum rate or amount of any interest payable on or in connection with this Lease. If applicable law is ever judicially interpreted so as to render usurious any interest called for under this Lease, or contracted for, charged, taken, reserved, or received with respect to this Lease, then it is Landlord's and Tenant's express intent that all excess amounts theretofore collected by Landlord be credited on the applicable obligation (or, if the obligation has been or would thereby be paid in full, refunded to Tenant), and the provisions of this Lease immediately shall be deemed reformed and the amounts thereafter collectible hereunder reduced, without the necessity of the execution of any new document, so as to comply with the applicable law, but so as to permit the recovery of the fullest amount otherwise called for hereunder.

(k)            Construction and interpretation of this Lease shall be governed by the laws of the state in which the Project is located, excluding any principles of conflicts of laws.

(l)            Time is of the essence as to the performance of Tenant's and Landlord’s obligations under this Lease.

 
15

 

(m)            All exhibits and addenda attached hereto are hereby incorporated into this Lease and made a part hereof. In the event of any conflict between such exhibits or addenda and the terms of this Lease, such exhibits or addenda shall control.

(n)            In the event either party hereto initiates litigation to enforce the terms and provisions of this Lease, the non-prevailing party in such action shall reimburse the prevailing party for its reasonable attorney's fees, filing fees, and court costs.

(o)            Tenant agrees and understands that Landlord shall have the right (provided that the exercise of Landlord’s rights does not adversely affect Tenant’s use and occupancy of the Premises or subject Tenant to additional costs), without Tenant’s consent, to place a solar electric generating system on the roof of the Building or enter into a lease for the roof of the Building whereby such roof tenant shall have the right to install a solar electric generating system on the roof of the Building.

(p)            This Lease may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, and all of such counterparts shall constitute one Lease. Execution copies of this Lease may be delivered by facsimile or email, and the parties hereto agree to accept and be bound by facsimile signatures or scanned signatures transmitted via email hereto, which signatures shall be considered as original signatures with the transmitted Lease having the same binding effect as an original signature on an original Lease. At the request of either party, any facsimile document or scanned document transmitted via email is to be re-executed in original form by the party who executed the original facsimile document or scanned document. Neither party may raise the use of a facsimile machine or scanned document or the fact that any signature was transmitted through the use of a facsimile machine or email as a defense to the enforcement of this Lease.

38.             Landlord's Lien/Security Interest . Tenant hereby grants Landlord a security interest, and this Lease constitutes a security agreement, within the meaning of and pursuant to the Uniform Commercial Code of the state in which the Premises are situated as to all of Tenant's property situated in, or upon, or used in connection with the Premises (except merchandise sold in the ordinary course of business) as security for all of Tenant's obligations hereunder, including, without limitation, the obligation to pay rent. Such personalty thus encumbered includes specifically all trade and other fixtures for the purpose of this Paragraph and inventory, equipment, contract rights, accounts receivable and the proceeds thereof. In order to perfect such security interest, Tenant shall execute such financing statements and file the same at Tenant's expense at the state and county Uniform Commercial Code filing offices as often as Landlord in its discretion shall require; and Tenant hereby irrevocably appoints Landlord its agent for the purpose of executing and filing such financing statements on Tenant's behalf as Landlord shall deem necessary.

39.             Limitation of Liability of Trustees, Shareholders, and Officers of Landlord . Any obligation or liability whatsoever of Landlord, which may arise at any time under this Lease or any obligation or liability which may be incurred by it pursuant to any other instrument, transaction, or undertaking contemplated hereby shall not be personally binding upon, nor shall resort for the enforcement thereof be had to the property of, its trustees, directors, shareholders, officers, employees or agents, regardless of whether such obligation or liability is in the nature of contract, tort, or otherwise.

40.             Early Occupancy. Landlord shall allow Tenant access to the Premises on September 1, 2011 to prepare the Premises for the commencement of Tenant’s normal business operations, subject to applicable ordinances and building codes governing Tenant’s right to occupy or perform in the Premises. Access and occupancy will be coordinated with Landlord's contractor so as not to interfere with or impede completion of the initial tenant improvements at the Premises. During such period prior to the Commencement Date, Tenant shall be bound by its obligations under the Lease, but shall not be obligated to pay the monthly Base Rent or any other charges payable by Tenant to Landlord as set forth in the Lease.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have executed this Lease as of the day and year first above written.

 
16

 

TENANT:
 
LANDLORD:
         
     
BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C., a Delaware
limited liability company
         
By:
/s/ Ava M. Hahn
 
By:
/s/ Charles Sullivan
Name:
Ava M. Hahn
 
Name:
Charles Sullivan
Title:
VP, General Counsel
 
Title:
Vice President
         
Address:
   
Address:
 
         
960 Stewart Dr.
 
7887 East Belleview Avenue, Suite 325
Sunnyvale, CA 94085
 
Denver, Colorado 80111

 
17

 

Rules and Regulations

1.
The sidewalk, entries, and driveways of the Project shall not be obstructed by Tenant, or its agents, or used by them for any purpose other than ingress and egress to and from the Premises.

2.
Tenant shall not place any objects, including antennas, outdoor furniture, etc., in the parking areas, landscaped areas or other areas outside of its Premises, or on the roof of the Project without Landlord’s prior written consent which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.

3.
Except for seeing-eye dogs, no animals shall be allowed in the offices, halls, or corridors in the Project.

4.
Tenant shall not disturb the occupants of the Project or adjoining buildings by the use of any radio or musical instrument or by the making of loud or improper noises.

5.
If Tenant desires telegraphic, telephonic or other electric connections into the Premises, Landlord or its agent will direct the electrician as to where and how the wires may be introduced into the Premises; and, without such direction, no boring or cutting of wires will be permitted. Any such installation or connection shall be made at Tenant's expense.

6.
Tenant shall not install or operate any steam or gas engine or boiler, or other mechanical apparatus in the Premises, except as specifically approved in the Lease. The use of oil, gas or inflammable liquids for heating, lighting or any other purpose is expressly prohibited. Explosives or other articles deemed extra hazardous shall not be brought into the Project.

7.
Parking any type of recreational vehicles is specifically prohibited on or about the Project. Further, parking any type of trucks, trailers or other vehicles in the Building is specifically prohibited. In the event that a vehicle is disabled, it shall be removed within 48 hours. There shall be no "For Sale" or other advertising signs on or about any parked vehicle. All vehicles shall be parked in the designated parking areas in conformity with all signs and other markings. All parking will be open parking, and no reserved parking, numbering or lettering of individual spaces will be permitted except as specified by Landlord or in the Lease.

8.
Tenant shall maintain the Premises free from rodents, insects and other pests.

9.
Landlord reserves the right to exclude or expel from the Project any person who, in the judgment of Landlord, is intoxicated or under the influence of liquor or drugs or who shall in any manner do any act in violation of the Rules and Regulations of the Project.

10.
Tenant shall not cause any unnecessary labor by reason of Tenant's carelessness or indifference in the preservation of good order and cleanliness. Landlord shall not be responsible to Tenant for any loss of property on the Premises, however occurring, or for any damage done to the effects of Tenant by the janitors or any other employee or person.

11.
Tenant shall give Landlord prompt notice of any defects in the water, lawn sprinkler, sewage, gas pipes, electrical lights and fixtures, heating apparatus, or any other service equipment affecting the Premises.

12.
Tenant shall not permit storage outside the Premises, or dumping of waste or refuse or permit any harmful materials to be placed in any drainage system or sanitary system in or about the Premises.

13.
All moveable trash receptacles provided by the trash disposal firm for the Premises must be kept in the trash enclosure areas, if any, provided for that purpose.

14.
No auction, public or private, will be permitted on the Premises or the Project.

 
18

 

15.
No awnings shall be placed over the windows in the Premises except with the prior written consent of Landlord.

16.
The Premises shall not be used for lodging, sleeping or cooking or for any immoral or illegal purposes or for any purpose other than that specified in the Lease. No gaming devices shall be operated in the Premises.

17.
Tenant shall ascertain from Landlord the maximum amount of electrical current which can safely be used in the Premises, taking into account the capacity of the electrical wiring in the Project and the Premises and the needs of other tenants, and shall not use more than such safe capacity. Landlord's consent to the installation of electric equipment shall not relieve Tenant from the obligation not to use more electricity than such safe capacity.

18.
Tenant assumes full responsibility for protecting the Premises from theft, robbery and pilferage.

19.
Tenant shall not install or operate on the Premises any machinery or mechanical devices of a nature not directly related to Tenant's ordinary use of the Premises and shall keep all such machinery free of vibration, noise and air waves which may be transmitted beyond the Premises.

20.
Tenant shall not permit smoking in the office areas of the Premises.

21.
No racking or storage shall occur within 12-inches of demising walls, office and warehouse separation walls, exterior walls, and columns.

 
19

 

ADDENDUM 1

BASE RENT ADJUSTMENTS

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.

Base Rent shall equal the following amounts for the respective periods set forth below:

Period
Monthly Base Rent
   
Month 1
through
Month 4.5
$0.00*
       
Month 4.5
through
Month 5
$8,053.64
       
Month 6
through
Month 17
$16,107.28
       
Month 18
through
Month 29
$16,590.50
       
Month 30
through
Month 41
$17,088.21
       
Month 42
through
Month 53
$17,600.86
       
Month 54
through
Month 65
$18,128.89

*Tenant shall be responsible for Operating Expenses during free rent period.

 
20

 

ADDENDUM 2

HVAC MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.

Paragraph 11, captioned "TENANT REPAIRS," is revised to include the following:

Tenant agrees to enter into and maintain through the term of the Lease, a regularly scheduled preventative maintenance/service contract for servicing all hot water, heating and air conditioning systems and equipment within the Premises. Landlord requires a qualified HVAC contractor perform this work. A certificate must be provided to the Landlord upon occupancy of the leased Premises.

The service contract must become effective within thirty (30) days of occupancy, and service visits shall be performed on a quarterly basis. Landlord suggests that Tenant send the following list to a qualified HVAC contractor to be assured that these items are included in the maintenance contract:

 
1.
Adjust belt tension;
 
2.
Lubricate all moving parts, as necessary;
 
3.
Inspect and adjust all temperature and safety controls;
 
4.
Check refrigeration system for leaks and operation;
 
5.
Check refrigeration system for moisture;
 
6.
Inspect compressor oil level and crank case heaters;
 
7.
Check head pressure, suction pressure and oil pressure;
 
8.
Inspect air filters and replace when necessary;
 
9.
Check space conditions;
 
10.
Check condensate drains and drain pans and clean, if necessary;
 
11.
Inspect and adjust all valves;
 
12.
Check and adjust dampers;
 
13.
Run machine through complete cycle.

 
21

 

ADDENDUM 3

MOVE-OUT CONDITIONS

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.


With respect to Paragraph 21 of the Lease, Tenant shall surrender the Premises in the same condition as received, ordinary wear and tear, casualty loss, and condemnation covered by Paragraphs 15 and 16 excepted. The following list is designed to assist Tenant in the move-out procedures but is not intended to be all inclusive.

1.
All lighting is to be placed into good working order. This includes replacement of bulbs, ballasts, and lenses as needed.

2.
All truck doors and dock levelers shall be serviced and placed in good operating order. This would include the necessary replacement of any dented truck door panels and adjustment of door tension to insure proper operation. All door panels which are replaced need to be painted to match the building standard.

3.
All structural steel columns in the warehouse and office shall be inspected for damage. Repairs of this nature should be pre-approved by the Landlord prior to implementation.

4.
Heating/air-conditioning systems should be placed in good working order, including the necessary replacement of any parts to return the unit to a well maintained condition. This includes warehouse heaters and exhaust fans. Upon move-out, Landlord will have an exit inspection performed by a certified mechanical contractor to determine the condition.

5.
All holes in the sheetrock walls should be repaired prior to move-out.

6.
The carpets and vinyl tiles should be in a clean condition and should not have any holes or chips in them. Landlord will accept normal wear on these items provided they appear to be in a maintained condition.

7.
Facilities should be returned in a clean condition which would include cleaning of the coffee bar, restroom areas, windows, and other portions of the Premises.

8.
The warehouse should be in a clean condition with all inventory and racking removed and the warehouse floor mechanically cleaned if necessary. There should be no protrusion of anchors from the warehouse floor and all holes should be appropriately patched. If machinery/equipment is removed, the electrical lines should be properly terminated at the nearest junction box.

9.
All exterior windows with cracks or breakage should be replaced.

10.
The Tenant shall provide to Landlord the keys for all locks on the Premises, including front doors, rear doors, and interior doors.

11.
Items that have been added by the Tenant and affixed to the Building will remain the property of Landlord, unless agreed otherwise. This would include but is not limited to mini-blinds, air conditioners, electrical, water heaters, cabinets, flooring, etc. Please note that if modifications have been made to the Premises, such as the addition of office areas, Landlord retains the right to have the Tenant remove any Tenant-Made Alterations at Tenant’s expense. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of any conflict between this provision and Paragraph 12 (Tenant-Made Alterations) of this Lease, Paragraph 12 shall control.

 
22

 

12.
All electrical systems should be in good working order, including the water heater. Faucets and toilets should not leak.

13.
All plumbing fixtures should be in a safe condition that conforms to code. Bare wires and dangerous installations should be corrected prior to move-out.

14.
All dock bumpers must be left in place and well secured.

 
23

 

ADDENDUM 4

CANCELLATION OPTION

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.

Provided no Event of Default shall then exist and no condition shall then exist which with the passage of time or giving of notice, or both, would constitute an Event of Default, Tenant shall have the right at any time on or before August 31 st , 2014 to send Landlord written notice (the " Termination Notice ") that Tenant has elected to terminate this Lease effective on March 1 st , 2015 .

If Tenant elects to terminate this Lease pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence, the effectiveness of such termination shall be conditioned upon Tenant paying to Landlord $175,000.00 contemporaneously with Tenant's delivery of the Termination Notice to Landlord. Such amount is consideration for Tenant's option to terminate and shall not be applied to rent or any other obligation of Tenant. Landlord and Tenant shall be relieved of all obligations accruing under this Lease after the effective date of such termination but not any obligations accruing under the Lease prior to the effective date of such termination.

 
24

 

ADDENDUM 5

TWO RENEWAL OPTIONS
(BASEBALL ARBITRATION)

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.

(a)             Provided that as of the time of the giving of the First Extension Notice and the Commencement Date of the First Extension Term, (x) Tenant or a Tenant Affiliate is the Tenant originally named herein, (y) Tenant actually occupies all of the Premises initially demised under this Lease and any space added to the Premises, and (z) no Event of Default exists or would exist but for the passage of time or the giving of notice, or both; then Tenant shall have the right to extend the Lease Term for an additional term of five (5) years (such additional term is hereinafter called the " First Extension Term ") commencing on the day following the expiration of the Lease Term (hereinafter referred to as the " Commencement Date of the First Extension Term "). Tenant shall give Landlord notice (hereinafter called the " First Extension Notice ") of its election to extend the term of the Lease Term at least six (6) months, but not more than nine (9) months, prior to the scheduled expiration date of the Lease Term.

(b)             Provided that as of the time of the giving of the Second Extension Notice and the Commencement Date of the Second Extension Term, (x) Tenant is the Tenant originally named herein, (y) Tenant actually occupies all of the Premises initially demised under this Lease and any space added to the Premises, and (z) no Event of Default exists or would exist but for the passage of time or the giving of notice, or both and provided Tenant has exercised its option for the First Extension Term; then Tenant shall have the right to extend the Lease Term for an additional term of five (5) years (such additional term is hereinafter called the " Second Extension Term ") commencing on the day following the expiration of the First Extension Term (hereinafter referred to as the " Commencement Date of the Second Extension Term "). Tenant shall give Landlord notice (hereinafter called the " Second Extension Notice ") of its election to extend the term of the Lease Term at least six (6) months, but not more than nine (9) months, prior to the scheduled expiration date of the First Extension Term.

(c)             The Base Rent payable by Tenant to Landlord during the First Extension Term shall be the then Fair Market Rent as defined below.

(d)             The Base Rent payable by Tenant to Landlord during the Second Extension Term shall be the then Fair Market Rent as defined below.

(e)             The term "Fair Market Rent" shall mean the Base Rent, expressed as an annual rent per square foot of floor area, which Landlord would have received from leasing the Premises for the First Extension Term, or Second Extension Term (whichever is applicable) to an unaffiliated person which is not then a tenant in the Project, assuming that such space were to be delivered in "as-is" condition, and taking into account the rental which such other tenant would most likely have paid for such premises, including market escalations. Fair Market Rent shall not be reduced by reason of any costs or expenses saved by Landlord by reason of Landlord's not having to find a new tenant for the Premises (including without limitation brokerage commissions, cost of improvements necessary to prepare the space for such tenant's occupancy, rent concession, or lost rental income during any vacancy period). Fair Market Rent means only the rent component defined as Base Rent in the Lease and does not include reimbursements and payments by Tenant to Landlord with respect to Operating Expenses and other items payable or reimbursable by Tenant under the Lease. In addition to its obligation to pay Base Rent (as determined herein), Tenant shall continue to pay and reimburse Landlord as set forth in the Lease with respect to such Operating Expenses and other items with respect to the Premises during the First Extension Term or Second Extension Term (whichever is applicable). The arbitration process described below shall be limited to the determination of the Base Rent and shall not affect or otherwise reduce or modify the Tenant's obligation to pay or reimburse Landlord for such Operating Expenses and other reimbursable items.

 
25

 

(f)             Landlord shall notify Tenant of its determination of the Fair Market Rent (which shall be made in Landlord's sole reasonable discretion for the First Extension Term or Second Extension Term (whichever is applicable), and Tenant shall advise Landlord of any objection within 10 business days of receipt of Landlord's notice. Failure to respond within the 10 business day period shall constitute Tenant's acceptance of such Fair Market Rent. If Tenant objects, Landlord and Tenant shall commence negotiations to attempt to agree upon the Fair Market Rent within 30 days of Landlord's receipt of Tenant's notice. If the parties cannot agree, each acting in good faith but without any obligation to agree, then the Lease Term shall not be extended and shall terminate on its scheduled termination date and Tenant shall have no further right hereunder or any remedy by reason of the parties' failure to agree unless Tenant or Landlord invokes the arbitration procedure provided below to determine the Fair Market Rent.

(g)            Arbitration to determine the Fair Market Rent shall be in accordance with the Real Estate Valuation Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. Unless otherwise required by state law, arbitration shall be conducted in the metropolitan area where the Project is located by a single arbitrator unaffiliated with either party. Either party may elect to arbitrate by sending written notice to the other party and the Regional Office of the American Arbitration Association within 5 days after the 30-day negotiating period provided in Paragraph (f), invoking the binding arbitration provisions of this paragraph. Landlord and Tenant shall each submit to the arbitrator their respective proposal of Fair Market Rent. The arbitrator must choose between the Landlord's proposal and the Tenant's proposal and may not compromise between the two or select some other amount. The cost of the arbitration shall be paid by Tenant if the Fair Market Rent is that proposed by Landlord and by Landlord if the Fair Market Rent is that proposed by Tenant; and shall be borne equally otherwise. If the arbitrator has not determined the Fair Market Rent as of the end of the Lease Term, Tenant shall pay 103 percent of the Base Rent in effect under the Lease as of the end of the Lease Term until the Fair Market Rent is determined as provided herein. Upon such determination, Landlord and Tenant shall make the appropriate adjustments to the payments between them.

(h)            The parties consent to the jurisdiction of any appropriate court to enforce the arbitration provisions of this Addendum and to enter judgment upon the decision of the arbitrator.

(i)             The determination of Base Rent does not reduce the Tenant's obligation to pay or reimburse Landlord for Operating Expenses and other reimbursable items as set forth in the Lease, and Tenant shall reimburse and pay Landlord as set forth in the Lease with respect to such Operating Expenses and other items with respect to the Premises during the First Extension Term and Second Extension Term without regard to any cap on such expenses set forth in the Lease.

(j)             Except for the Base Rent as determined above, Tenant's occupancy of the Premises during the First Extension Term and the Second Extension Term shall be on the same terms and conditions as are in effect immediately prior to the expiration of the initial Lease Term or the First Extension Term; provided, however, Tenant shall have no further right to any allowances, credits or abatements or any options to expand, contract, renew or extend the Lease.

(k)             If Tenant does not give the First Extension Notice within the period set forth in paragraph (a) above, Tenant's right to extend the Lease Term for the First Extension Term and the Second Extension Term shall automatically terminate. If Tenant does not give the Second Extension Notice within the period set forth in paragraph (b) above, Tenant's right to extend the Lease Term for the Second Extension Term shall automatically terminate. Time is of the essence as to the giving of the First Extension Notice and Second Extension Notice.

(l)             Landlord shall have no obligation to refurbish or otherwise improve the Premises for the First Extension Term or the Second Extension Term. The Premises shall be tendered on the Commencement Date of the First Extension Term and Second Extension Term in "as-is" condition.

(m)            If the Lease is extended for either the First Extension Term or Second Extension Term, then Landlord shall prepare and Tenant shall execute an amendment to the Lease confirming the extension of the Lease Term and the other provisions applicable thereto (the "Amendment").

(n)             If Tenant exercises its right to extend the term of the Lease for the First Extension Term or Second Extension Term pursuant to this Addendum, the term "Lease Term" as used in the Lease, shall be construed to include, when practicable, the First Extension Term or Second Extension Term, as applicable, except as provided in (j) above.

 
26

 

ADDENDUM 6

CONSTRUCTION
(TURNKEY)

ATTACHED TO AND A PART OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT
DATED _________________, 2011 BETWEEN

BRE/US Industrial Properties, L.L.C.
and
ShoreTel, Inc.

(a)            Landlord agrees to furnish or perform at Landlord's sole cost and expense those items of construction and those improvements (the " Initial Improvements ") specified below and as shown in Exhibit B-1:

 
1.
Install one (1) 12.5-ton HVAC system in warehouse area.
 
2.
Demo offices in existing office area. Patch carpet and paint affected areas.
 
3.
Construct 15’x30’ break room with VCT flooring and 10’ millwork (upper & lower cabinets), including the plumbing and sink.
 
4.
Drywall and fill openings between 38897 & 38929 Cherry St.
 
5.
Provide vinyl composition tile flooring with “anti-static” wax in two offices adjacent to warehouse.
 
6.
Scrape glue in approximately 6’x6’ area in warehouse area adjacent to office area along front glass line.

(b)            If Tenant shall desire any changes, Tenant shall so advise Landlord in writing and Landlord shall determine whether such changes can be made in a reasonable and feasible manner. Any and all costs of reviewing any requested changes, and any and all costs of making any changes to the Initial Improvements which Tenant may request and which Landlord may agree to shall be at Tenant's sole cost and expense and shall be paid to Landlord upon demand and before execution of the change order.

(c)            Landlord shall proceed with and complete the construction of the Initial Improvements. As soon as such improvements have been Substantially Completed, Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing of the date that the Initial Improvements were Substantially Completed. The Initial Improvements shall be deemed substantially completed (" Substantially Completed ") when, in the opinion of the construction manager (whether an employee or agent of Landlord or a third party construction manager) (" Construction Manager "), the Initial Improvements are substantially completed except for punch list items which do not prevent in any material way the use of the Initial Improvements for the purposes for which they were intended. In the event Tenant, its employees, agents, or contractors cause construction of such improvements to be delayed, the date of Substantial Completion shall be deemed to be the date that, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, Substantial Completion would have occurred if such delays had not taken place. Without limiting the foregoing, Tenant shall be solely responsible for delays caused by Tenant's request for any changes in the plans, Tenant's request for long lead items or Tenant's interference with the construction of the Initial Improvements, and such delays shall not cause a deferral of the Commencement Date beyond what it otherwise would have been. After the date the Initial Improvements are Substantially Complete Tenant shall, upon demand, execute and deliver to Landlord a letter of acceptance of delivery of the Initial Improvements. In the event of any dispute as to the Initial Improvements the certificate of the Construction Manager shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

 
27

 

(d)            The failure of Tenant to take possession of or to occupy the Premises shall not serve to relieve Tenant of obligations arising on the Commencement Date or delay the payment of rent by Tenant. Subject to applicable ordinances and building codes governing Tenant's right to occupy or perform in the Premises, Tenant shall be allowed to install its tenant improvements, machinery, equipment, fixtures, or other property on the Premises during the final stages of completion of construction provided that Tenant does not thereby interfere with the completion of construction or cause any labor dispute as a result of such installations, and provided further that Tenant does hereby agree to indemnify, defend, and hold Landlord harmless from any loss or damage to such property, and all liability, loss, or damage arising from any injury to the Project or the property of Landlord, its contractors, subcontractors, or materialmen, and any death or personal injury to any person or persons arising out of such installations, unless any such loss, damage, liability, death, or personal injury was caused by Landlord's negligence. Any such occupancy or performance in the Premises shall be in accordance with the provisions governing Tenant-Made Alterations and Trade Fixtures in the Lease, and shall be subject to Tenant providing to Landlord satisfactory evidence of insurance for personal injury and property damage related to such installations and satisfactory payment arrangements with respect to installations permitted hereunder. Delay in putting Tenant in possession of the Premises shall not serve to extend the term of this Lease or to make Landlord liable for any damages arising therefrom.

 
28

 

EXHIBIT A

SITE PLAN

MOWRY BUSINESS CENTER
Building #3

IMAGE 1

 
29

 

EXHIBIT B

FLOOR PLAN

38897 CHERRY STREET
NEWARK, CA 94560
+/- 32,872 square feet

IMAGE 2

 
30

 

EXHIBIT B-1

DEMO PLAN

IMAGE 3

 
31

 

EXHIBIT B-2

PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN

IMAGE 4

 
32

 

EXHIBIT C

SIGN CRITERIA

MOWRY BUSINESS CENTER

WINDOW IDENTIFICATION SIGNS :

Each Tenant will be allowed one window sign placed either to the left or the right of the entrance door, whichever provides the best visibility.

Company names, logos or symbols will be allowed in this area-color and size to be determined by the Tenant. All other copy in this area except for logos or symbols will be mat white vinyl pressure sensitive letters.

Copy must start at 5' from grade, working down to no more than 3 2 ' from grade. Sign layout including copy, sizes and color must be approved by the building management. Management reserves the right to deny any copy or color it considers unsuitable.

One security decal only may be applied to the front door glass in the lower corner if the Tenant so desires. All exterior alarm bells are to be mounted to the rear of the building only.

DIRECTORY SIGN IDENTIFICATION :

A directory sign has been provided for each building. If only one Tenant occupies an entire building, that Tenant shall be allowed to utilize the entire directory sign area for their pressure sensitive, vinyl letters with a letter height suitable for the area allowed, font type to be determined by the Landlord. A logo is also allowed in the company colors, subject to the approval of the Landlord.

If two (2) Tenants occupy a building, signs shall be shared equally by the number of tenants within the building, utilizing pressure sensitive, vinyl letters with a letter height suitable for the area allowed. A logo in the company colors will be allowed if so desired subject to approval by Landlord. A thin line will divide the areas between tenants.

If three (3) or more tenants occupy the building, the sign shall be shared equally by number of tenants. Signs shall consist of pressure sensitive, matte vinyl lettering, in a color and font to be determined by the Landlord. Directory signs shall list the street number and the company names only, no slogans or symbols allowed.

REAR LOADING SIGNS:

Each Tenant will be allowed to identify its rear door for shipping and receiving purposes. The company name shall be placed on a 36" x 24" aluminum panel adjacent to the rear doors.

Copy shall consist of Tall Tree Green (# ILB6A-Devoe) capital letters only in Helvetica Medium (to match the numbers) or Bembo (to match the directory) style. Company names and logos only are allowed.

Management reserves the right to deny any copy it considers unsuitable. Layout is to be approved by building management. The cost of all lettering and logos will be the responsibility of the Tenant. No other signs are allowed in the windows or doors.

 
33

 

EXHIBIT D

CUSTOMER FINISH STANDARDS

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS

 
6.1
CABINETS: Furnish and install a coffee bar and/or lunch room base cabinet. The base cabinet(s) shall be plastic laminate by Wilsonart or equal in the manufacturer's standard color. The cabinet(s) shall be 6-'0" long minimum and 34" high with European style hinges and chrome wire pulls U.O.N. Each cabinet shall have one row of drawers over doors.
 
6.2
COUNTERTOPS: The countertops shall be plastic laminate by Wilsonart or approved equal. The coffee bar tops shall have a square front and top edge with a 4" splash and a radiused inside corner at the backsplash.
 
6.4
MILLWORK QUALITY: Architectural millwork and cabinetry shall be of a construction quality equal to that of the Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI) custom grade for flush overlay construction.

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

 
9.1
FIRE RATED WALLS: Metal studs with one layer of 5/8" type "X" gypsum board on each side from the floor to the roof deck. The stud size and spacing shall be per the stud manufacturer's tables and local code requirements. Install fire safing between the gypsum board and roof deck U.O.N. Penetrations at one hour walls shall be fire safed or caulked.
 
9.2
FULL HEIGHT DRYWALL PARTITIONS (including tenant demising walls): Metal studs with one layer of 5/8" type "X" gypsum board on each side from the floor to the roof deck. The stud size and spacing shall be per the stud manufacturer's tables and local code requirements. Drywall installed above an acoustical ceiling shall be firetaped and screws spotted
 
9.3
OFFICE DRYWALL PARTITIONS: All partitions in areas with ceilings shall be undergrid 3-5/8" or 3-1/2” x 25 GA. metal studs at 24" o.c. with 5/8" fire code type "X" gypsum board on each side. The ceiling grid shall be installed first with walls built to the grid. The intersection of the wall at the grid shall be snug and flush. Install "L" metal trim at the top of the wall. Toilet room perimeter walls shall be built to 6" above grid. Furr perimeter concrete walls and interior columns in office areas to 6" above the grid.
 
9.4
OFFICE/TOILET RM. WALL/CEILING FINISH: All drywall shall receive a light skip trowel textured wall finish (Portland and Seattle area projects shall receive a smooth finish). The skip trowel texture shall be the size of a quarter dollar coin. The finish shall be mocked-up on a 4'x4' piece of drywall on the jobsite for the owner's approval prior to final application. The toilet and shower room ceilings shall have a skip trowel textured drywall ceiling installed at 8'-0" A.F.F. U.O.N. Walls receiving wallcovering (as a customer upgrade) shall have a smooth finish.
 
9.5
WAREHOUSE GYPSUM BOARD WALL FINISH: All drywall in the warehouse shall be fire taped only. Spot nails in firetaped areas.
 
9.8
ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE: Furnish and install 24" x 48" x 5/8" USG Omni non-directional fissured tile or equal, installed at 9'-0" A.F.F., U.O.N. in all office areas except toilet and shower rooms.
 
9.9
ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Furnish and install Class "A" 15/16" exposed "T" grid system, intermediate duty with 1 1/2 " main tee, 1 1/2 ” cross tee, and 7/8" x 7/8" wall mold as manufactured by Donn or equal. Fire rated grid and tile shall be used where code requires. The grid color shall be white to match the tile exactly.
 
9.10
CARPET: Carpeting shall be Designweave, Shaw or approved equal, loop graphic, solution dyed 100% nylon, 26 oz. per square yard average yarn weight minimum, 1/10th gauge, color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors U.O.N. Carpet shall be direct glue down U.O.N.
 
9.11
CARPET PAD: Only when specified by the customer as an upgrade, shall be a minimum 3/8" thick, 8lb. dense rebound or slab rubber pad.
 
9.12
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE: Where indicated, furnish and install 1/8" gauge, standard grade, VCT as manufactured by Tarkett or Armstrong. Install VCT in all lunch rooms. No VCT shall be installed in toilet rooms.

 
34

 

 
9.13
RUBBER BASE: All areas receiving floor covering except the toilet rooms shall have 4" high topset rubber base as manufactured by Burke, Roppe, or Tarkett in a standard color.
 
9.15
TRANSITION STRIPS: Furnish and install black vinyl transition strips at all changes in flooring material U.O.N.
 
9.17
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER: All concrete floor patches shall be resealed to match the existing concrete floor sealer / hardener.
 
9.18
PAINT: On walls receiving a skip trowelled finish, apply one (1) coat of interior flat latex paint, Fuller O'Brien or equal in a standard light color. Toilet and shower rooms and the wall at the coffee bar shall receive one (1) coat of latex semi-gloss enamel over one (1) coat of PVA sealer. Walls receiving wallcovering shall receive one coat of sealer. Smooth finished walls shall receive two coats of eggshell latex paint. No warehouse areas shall be painted unless requested by the customer as an upgrade.

DIVISION 15 PLUMBING
 
15.1.6
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM:
Coffee bar / Lunch Room sink : Elkay, model GECR 1918, stainless steel, with a Delta #100 faucet. If the Lunch Room base cabinet is 8'-0" or longer, use an Elkay model GECR 2521.
Water heater : The water heater shall be A.O. Smith, State or approved equal sized to meet the demand. It shall be located on the warehouse floor in a smitty pan draining into a hub drain with a trap primer. The location shall be as located by the architect or approved by the owner. All plumbing connections shall be made with dielectric unions.

 
35

 

EXHIBIT E

FORM OF SUBORDINATION, NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT

RECORDING REQUESTED BY
AND WHEN RECORDED MAIL TO:

Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
Real Estate Banking Group
375 Park Avenue, 9 th Floor
New York, New York 10152
Attn:   Linda Horvath/Loan Administration
Loan No. 1003317
 


SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT; ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF LEASE ASSIGNMENT, ESTOPPEL, ATTORNMENT AND NON-DISTURBANCE AGREEMENT
(Lease To Mortgage)

NOTICE:
THIS SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT RESULTS IN YOUR SECURITY INTEREST IN THE PROPERTY BECOMING SUBJECT TO AND OF LOWER PRIORITY THAN THE LIEN OF SOME OTHER OR LATER SECURITY INSTRUMENT.

THIS SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT; ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF LEASE ASSIGNMENT, ESTOPPEL, ATTORNMENT AND NON-DISTURBANCE AGREEMENT ("Agreement") is made as of [DATE OF DOCUMENTS] by and between [BORROWER NAME] ("Owner"), [NAME OF LESSEE HERE] ("Lessee") and WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, as Administrative Agent to the Lenders (defined below) (together with its successor and assigns, "Administrative Agent").

R E C I T A L S

A.
Pursuant to the terms and provisions of a lease dated [DATE OF LEASE HERE] ("Lease"), Owner, as "Lessor", granted to Lessee a leasehold estate in and to[ a portion of] the property described on Exhibit A attached hereto and incorpo­rated herein by this reference (which property, together with all improvements now or hereafter located on the property, is defined as the "Property").

B.
[Said Lease contains provisions and terms granting Lessee an option to purchase the Property (the "Option To Purchase”).]

C.
Owner has executed, or proposes to execute, a mortgage with absolute assignment of leases and rents, security agreement and fixture filing ("Mortgage") securing, among other things, certain promissory notes (collectively, the "Notes") in the principal sum of $[__________], in favor of certain lenders (the “Lenders”), which Notes are payable with interest and upon the terms and conditions described therein ("Loan"). The Loan has been or will be furnished by the Lenders to the Owner pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement by and among the Lenders, Administrative Agent, the Owner and certain of its affiliates (“Loan Agreement”). Administrative Agent has been appointed the agent of the Lenders. The Mortgage is to be recorded concurrently herewith.

 
36

 

D.
As a condition to making the Loan secured by the Mortgage, Administrative Agent and the Lenders require that the Mortgage be unconditionally and at all times remain a lien on the Property, prior and superior to all the rights of Lessee under the Lease [and the Option To Purchase] and that the Lessee specifically and unconditionally subordinate the Lease [and the Option To Purchase] to the lien of the Mortgage.

E.
Owner and Lessee have agreed to the subordination, attornment and other agreements herein in favor of Administrative Agent.

NOW THEREFORE, for valuable consideration and to induce Lender to make the Loan, Owner and Lessee hereby agree for the benefit of Lender as follows:

A.
SUBORDINATION . OWNER AND LESSEE HEREBY AGREE THAT :
 
1.
Prior Lien . The Mortgage securing the Notes in favor of Administrative Agent on behalf of the Lenders, and any modifications, renewals or extensions thereof (including, without limitation, any modifications, renewals or extensions with respect to any additional advances made subject to the Mortgage), shall unconditionally be and at all times remain a lien on the Property prior and superior to the Lease [and the Option To Purchase]; and

 
2.
Whole Agreement . This Agreement shall be the whole agreement and only agreement with regard to the subordination of the Lease [and the Option To Purchase] to the lien of the Mortgage and shall supersede and cancel, but only insofar as would affect the priority between the Mortgage and the Lease [and the Option To Purchase], any prior agreements as to such subordination, including, without limitation, those provisions, if any, contained in the Lease which provide for the subordination of the Lease [and the Option To Purchase] to a deed or deeds of trust or to a mortgage or mortgages.

AND FURTHER , Lessee individually declares, agrees and acknowledges for the benefit of Administrative Agent and the Lenders, that:

 
4.
Use of Proceeds . Lenders, in making disbursements pursuant to the Notes, the Mortgage or any loan agreements with respect to the Property, is under no obligation or duty to, nor has Administrative Agent or the Lenders represented that they will, see to the application of such proceeds by the person or persons to whom Administrative Agent or the Lenders disburse such proceeds, and any application or use of such proceeds for purposes other than those provided for in such agreement or agreements shall not defeat this agreement to subordinate in whole or in part;

 
5.
Waiver, Relinquishment and Subordination . Lessee intentionally and unconditionally waives, relinquishes and subordinates all of Lessee's right, title and interest in and to the Property to the lien of the Mortgage and understands that in reliance upon, and in consideration of, this waiver, relinquishment and subordination, specific loans and advances are being and will be made by Lenders and, as part and parcel thereof, specific monetary and other obligations are being and will be entered into which would not be made or entered into but for said reliance upon this waiver, relinquishment and subordination.

B.
ASSIGNMENT . LESSEE ACKNOWLEDGES AND CONSENTS TO THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE LEASE BY LESSOR IN FAVOR OF ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT ON BEHALF OF THE LENDERS.

C.
EsTOPPEL . LESSEE ACKNOWLEDGES AND REPRESENTS THAT:

 
1.
Lease Effective . The Lease has been duly executed and delivered by Lessee and, subject to the terms and conditions thereof, the Lease is in full force and effect, the obligations of Lessee thereunder are valid and binding and there have been no modifications or additions to the Lease, written or oral;

 
2.
No Default . To the best of Lessee's knowledge, as of the date hereof: (i) there exists no breach, default, or event or condition which, with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both, would constitute a breach or default under the Lease; and (ii) there are no existing claims, defenses or offsets against rental due or to become due under the Lease;

 
37

 

 
3.
Entire Agreement . The Lease constitutes the entire agreement between Lessor and Lessee with respect to the Property and Lessee claims no rights with respect to the Property other than as set forth in the Lease; and

 
4.
No Prepaid Rent . No deposits or prepayments of rent have been made in connection with the Lease, except as follows: (if none, state "None") .

d.
ADDITIONAL AGREEMENTS . LESSEE COVENANTS AND AGREES THAT, DURING ALL SUCH TIMES AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT IS THE MORTGAGEE UNDER THE MORTGAGE:

 
1.
Modification, Termination and Cancellation . Without the prior written consent of Administrative Agent, not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed, Lessee shall not (A) consent to any modification, amendment, termination or cancellation of the Lease (in whole or in part), other than (1) immaterial amendments, supplements or modifications to the Lease, (2) subject to Administrative Agent’s rights set forth in Section 2 below, terminations of the Lease pursuant to express provisions of the Lease permitting Lessee to terminate the Lease, (3) a termination of the Lease resulting from a default thereunder on the part of Lessee, or (4) renewals, expansions or extensions of the Lease in each case provided that (i) the same does not cause the term of the Lease to exceed 180 months, plus up to two 60-month extensions (or equivalent combination of renewal options), (ii) rental rates thereunder are at least equal to prevailing market terms for the entire term thereof except that rental rates for the aforementioned extension terms shall not be less than 90% of prevailing market rates as of commencement thereof, (iii) any tenant improvement costs or brokerage commissions payable by Owner are consistent with market terms and (iv) the same shall not grant Lessee any purchase option, right of first refusal, right of first offer or expansion right, and (B) except in connection with a termination of the Lease permitted pursuant to this section, make any payment to Lessor in consideration of any modification, termination or cancellation of the Lease (in whole or in part);

 
2.
Notice of Default . Lessee will notify Administrative Agent in writing concurrently with any notice given to Lessor of any default by Lessor under the Lease, and Lessee agrees that Administrative Agent has the right (but not the obligation) to cure any breach or default specified in such notice within the time periods set forth below and Lessee will not declare a default of the Lease, as to Administrative Agent, if Administrative Agent cures such default within fifteen (15) days from and after the expiration of the time period provided in the Lease for the cure thereof by Lessor; provided , however , that if such default cannot with diligence be cured by Administrative Agent within such fifteen (15) day period, the commencement of action by Administrative Agent within such fifteen (15) day period to remedy the same shall be deemed sufficient so long as Lender pursues such cure with diligence;

 
3.
No Advance Rents . Lessee will make no payments or prepayments of rent more than one (1) month in advance of the time when the same become due under the Lease; and

 
4.
Assignment of Rents . Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default as defined in the Loan Agreement and receipt by Lessee of written notice from Administrative Agent that Administrative Agent has elected to terminate the license granted to Lessor to collect rents, as provided in the Mortgage, and directing the payment of rents by Lessee to Administrative Agent, Lessee shall comply with such direction to pay and shall not be required to determine whether Lessor is in default under the Loan and/or the Mortgage.

e.
ATTORNMENT . IN THE EVENT OF A FORECLOSURE UNDER THE MORTGAGE, LESSEE AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AND THE LENDERS (INCLUDING FOR THIS PURPOSE ANY TRANSFEREE OF ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT OR THE LENDERS OR ANY TRANSFEREE OF LESSOR'S TITLE IN AND TO THE PROPERTY BY ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT’S OR THE LENDER’S EXERCISE OF THE REMEDY OF SALE BY FORECLOSURE UNDER THE MORTGAGE) AS FOLLOWS :

 
38

 

 
1.
Payment of Rent . Lessee shall pay to Administrative Agent all rental payments required to be made by Lessee pursuant to the terms of the Lease for the duration of the term of the Lease;

 
2.
Continuation of Performance . Lessee shall be bound to Administrative Agent in accordance with all of the provisions of the Lease for the balance of the term thereof, and Lessee hereby attorns to Administrative Agent as its landlord, such attornment to be effective and self-operative without the execution of any further instrument immediately upon Lender succeeding to Lessor's interest in the Lease and giving written notice thereof to Lessee;

 
3.
No Offset . Administrative Agent shall not be liable for, nor subject to, any offsets or defenses which Lessee may have by reason of any act or omission of Lessor under the Lease, nor for the return of any sums which Lessee may have paid to Lessor under the Lease as and for security deposits, advance rentals or otherwise, except to the extent that such sums are actually delivered by Lessor to Administrative Agent; and

 
4.
Subsequent Transfer . If Administrative Agent, by succeeding to the interest of Lessor under the Lease, should become obligated to perform the covenants of Lessor thereunder, then, upon any further transfer of Lessor's interest by Administrative Agent, all of such obligations shall terminate as to Administrative Agent.

f.
NON-DISTURBANCE . IN THE EVENT OF A FORECLOSURE UNDER THE MORTGAGE, SO LONG AS THERE SHALL THEN EXIST NO BREACH, DEFAULT, OR EVENT OF DEFAULT ON THE PART OF LESSEE UNDER THE LEASE, ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AGREES FOR ITSELF AND ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS THAT THE LEASEHOLD INTEREST OF LESSEE UNDER THE LEASE SHALL NOT BE EXTINGUISHED OR TERMINATED BY REASON OF SUCH FORECLOSURE, BUT RATHER THE LEASE SHALL CONTINUE IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT AND ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT SHALL RECOGNIZE AND ACCEPT LESSEE AS TENANT UNDER THE LEASE SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS OF THE LEASE EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY THIS AGREEMENT; PROVIDED , HOWEVER , THAT LESSEE AND ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AGREE THAT THE FOLLOWING PROVISIONS OF THE LEASE (IF ANY) SHALL NOT BE BINDING ON ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT: ANY OPTION TO PURCHASE WITH RESPECT TO THE PROPERTY; ANY RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL WITH RESPECT TO THE PROPERTY; ANY PROVISION REGARDING THE USE OF INSURANCE PROCEEDS OR CONDEMNATION PROCEEDS WITH RESPECT TO THE PROPERTY WHICH IS INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS OF THE MORTGAGE.

g.
MISCELLANEOUS .

 
1.
Heirs, Successors, Assigns and Transferees . The covenants herein shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, the heirs, successors and assigns of the parties hereto; and

 
2.
Notices . All notices or other communications required or permitted to be given pursuant to the provisions hereof shall be deemed served upon delivery or, if mailed, upon the first to occur of receipt or the expiration of three (3) days after deposit in United States Postal Service, certified mail, postage prepaid and addressed to the address of Lessee or Lender appearing below:

"OWNER"

[BORROWER NAME]
c/o The Blackstone Group L.P.
345 Park Avenue
New York, New York 10154
Attn:   [Andrew Lax]
Tel: [(212) 583-5158]
Fax: [_____________]

 
39

 

with copy to:

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP
425 Lexington Avenue
New York, New York 10017
Attention: Sasan Mehrara, Esq.
Tel: (212) 455-2698
Fax: (212) 455-2502

"ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT"

Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
Minneapolis Loan Center
608 Second Avenue South, 11 th Floor
Minneapolis, MN 55402
Attention: Cindy Mayne

with copy to:

Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
Real Estate Banking Group
375 Park Avenue, 9th Floor
New York, NY 10152
Telephone No.: 212-214-8252
Telecopy No.: 212-214-8910

with copy to:

Morrison & Foerster LLP
1290 Avenue of the Americas
New York, New York 10104
Attention: John J. McCarthy, Esq.
Telephone No. (212) 468-8241
Telecopy No. (212) 468-7900

"LESSEE"

[NAME OF LESSEE HERE]
[LESSEE'S ADDRESS (STACKED) HERE]
Attn:   [___________________]
Tel: [_____________]
Fax: [_____________]

provided , however , any party shall have the right to change its address for notice hereunder by the giving of written notice thereof to the other party in the manner set forth in this Agreement; and

 
40

 

 
3.
Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and all of which together shall constitute and be construed as one and the same instrument; and

 
4.
Remedies Cumulative . All rights of Administrative Agent herein to collect rents on behalf of Lessor under the Lease are cumulative and shall be in addition to any and all other rights and remedies provided by law and by other agreements between Administrative Agent and Lessor or others; and

 
5.
Paragraph Headings . Paragraph headings in this Agreement are for convenience only and are not to be construed as part of this Agreement or in any way limiting or applying the provisions hereof.

H.         INCORPORATION . Exhibit A [and Lease Guarantor's Consent are] attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference.

[ signature pages follow ]

 
41

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the day and year first above written.

NOTICE:
THIS SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT CONTAINS A PROVISION WHICH ALLOWS THE PERSON OBLIGATED ON YOUR REAL PROPERTY SECURITY TO OBTAIN A LOAN A PORTION OF WHICH MAY BE EXPENDED FOR OTHER PURPOSES THAN IMPROVEMENT OF THE LAND.

IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT, PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THIS AGREEMENT, THE PARTIES CONSULT WITH THEIR ATTORNEYS WITH RESPECT HERETO.

   
“OWNER”
     
 
[BORROWING ENTITY]
     
 
By:
 
   
Name:
   
Title:
     
   
“ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT”
     
 
WELLS FARGO BANK,
 
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
     
 
By:
 
   
Name:
   
Title:
     
   
“LESSEE”
     
 
[NAME OF LESSEE HERE ]
     
 
By:
 
   
Name:
   
Title:

(ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED)

 
 

 

[ LEASE GUARANTOR'S CONSENT]

[The undersigned ("Lease Guarantor") consents to the foregoing Subordination Agreement; Acknowledgment of Lease Assignment, Estoppel, Attornment and Non-Disturbance Agreement and the transactions contemplated thereby and reaffirms its obligations under the lease guaranty ("Lease Guaranty") dated [DATE OF LEASE GUARANTY HERE]. Lease Guarantor further reaffirms that its obligations under the Lease Guaranty are separate and distinct from Lessee's obligations.]

AGREED :

Dated as of: [DATE OF DOCUMENTS]
“LEASE GUARANTOR”
 
[LEASE GUARANTOR BLOCK HERE]

 
 

 

DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY

EXHIBIT A to Subordination Agreement; Acknowledgment of Lease Assignment, Estoppel, Attornment and Non-Disturbance Agreement dated as of [DATE OF DOCUMENTS], executed by [BORROWER NAME], as "Owner", [NAME OF LESSEE HERE], as "Lessee", and WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, as "Lender".

[see attached]

 
 

 

STATE OF _______________________
SS
COUNTY OF______________________

The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on __________ ___, 201[_], by _____________________, as _____________________ of _____________________, a _____________________, on behalf of _____________________, a _____________________. He is either _____ is personally known to me or _____ presented his _____________ driver's license as identification.

(Notarial Seal)

________________________________________________
Notary Public

Print Name: ______________________________________
State of _______________

My commission expires
 
 


Exhibit 21
 
Subsidiaries
 
Subsidiary Name
Jurisdiction
ShoreTel International, Inc.
Delaware, USA
ShoreTel Pty Ltd
Australia
ShoreTel Ltd UK
UK
ShoreTel GmbH
Germany
ShoreTel Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Singapore

 


Exhibit 23.1
 
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 
We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statements (Nos. 333-172072, 333-164726, 333-157192, 333-149220, and 333-144338) on Form S-8 of our report dated September 12, 2011 relating to the consolidated financial statements of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (collectively, the "Company") (which report expresses an unqualified opinion and includes an explanatory paragraph relating to the change in the Company's method for recognizing revenue from the adoption of new accounting standards), and our report dated September 12, 2011 relating to the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting, appearing in the Annual Report on Form 10-K of the Company for the year ended June 30, 2011.
 
/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
 
San Jose, California
September 12, 2011
 
 


Exhibit 31.1
 
CERTIFICATION OF PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICER
PURSUANT TO EXCHANGE ACT RULES 13a-14(a) AND 15(d) -14(a), AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
 
I, Peter Blackmore, certify that:
 
1.
I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc.;
 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in the Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
 
 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 
 
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
 
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
Date: September 12, 2011
/s/ PETER BLACKMORE
 
Peter Blackmore
 
President and Chief Executive Officer
 
(Principal Executive Officer)
   
 



Exhibit 31.2
 
CERTIFICATION OF PRINCIPAL FINANCIAL OFFICER
PURSUANT TO EXCHANGE ACT RULES 13a-14(a) AND 15(d) -14(a), AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
 
I, Michael E. Healy, certify that:
 
1.
I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc.;
 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in the Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
 
 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 
 
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
 
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
Date: September ­­12­­­­­­­­, 2011
/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY
 
Michael E. Healy
 
Chief Financial Officer
 
(Principal Accounting and Financial Officer)
   

 


Exhibit 32.1
 
CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
 
I, Peter Blackmore, do hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to my knowledge:
 
The Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc. for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2011, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Report”), fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
The information contained in such Annual Report on Form 10-K fairly presents in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of ShoreTel, Inc.
 
Dated: September 12, 2011
By:
/s/ PETER BLACKMORE
 
Name:
Peter Blackmore
 
Title:
President and Chief Executive
   
Officer (Principal Executive Officer)
     
 



Exhibit 32.2
 
CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
 
I, Michael E. Healy, do hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to my knowledge:
 
The Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc. for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2011, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Report”), fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and;
 
The information contained in such Annual Report on Form 10-K fairly presents in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of ShoreTel, Inc.
 
Dated: September 12, 2011
By:
/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY
 
Name:
Michael E. Healy
 
Title:
Chief Financial Officer
   
(Principal Accounting and Financial Officer)